Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 301

s

Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

User Manual

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

! Important Notice on Product Safety


Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of
the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures. Systems with forced ventilation have
rotating items.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in
property damage.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950-1 / IEC 60950-1. All equipment connected
has to comply with the applicable safety standards.
Mount the systems in areas with restricted access only. Only trained and qualified personnel
may install, operate, and maintain the systems.

The same text in German:


Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Spannung.
Einige Teile können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen. Anlagen mit
Zwangsbelüftung haben drehende Teile.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverletzungen
und Sachschäden führen.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950-1 / IEC 60950-1. Angeschlossene
Geräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.
Die Anlagen dürfen nur in Betriebsstätten mit beschränktem Zutritt aufgebaut werden. Die
Anlagen dürfen nur durch geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal installiert, betrieben und
gewartet werden.

Trademarks:
All designations used in this document can be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for
their own purposes could violate the rights of their owners.

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006

Issued by the Communications Group


Hofmannstraße 51
D-81359 München

Technical modifications possible.


Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

2 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Contents
1 Notes on this Documentation ..................................................................................19
1.1 Customer Documentation........................................................................................19
1.2 Complementary Documents....................................................................................19
1.3 Symbols Used in the Customer Documentation .....................................................20
1.3.1 Symbol for Warnings ...............................................................................................20
1.3.2 Symbols for Notes ...................................................................................................20
1.3.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs...........................................................20
1.4 Notes on Licensed Software ...................................................................................20
1.5 Other 3rd Party Software License Agreements.......................................................20

2 Introduction..............................................................................................................22
3 Features ..................................................................................................................25
4 Hardware Configuration ..........................................................................................27

5 Software Configuration............................................................................................28
6 Installation ...............................................................................................................29
6.1 Route Configuration.................................................................................................29
6.2 Installing the LCT software package .......................................................................34
6.3 Uninstalling the LCT Software Package..................................................................39

7 Starting and Shutting down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ............................41
7.1 Starting TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ...........................................................41
7.2 Shutting Down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ................................................43

8 Main Interface Features ..........................................................................................44


8.1 Main Window ...........................................................................................................44
8.1.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................44
8.1.2 Main Menu Bar ........................................................................................................44
8.1.3 Work Area................................................................................................................48
8.2 Submenus (with Right Mouse Button Click)............................................................48
8.2.1 SDH Card ................................................................................................................48
8.2.2 CC Card...................................................................................................................48
8.2.3 SC Card...................................................................................................................49
8.2.4 Ethernet Card ..........................................................................................................49
8.2.5 RPR Card ................................................................................................................50

9 Security and User Management..............................................................................51


9.1 Account Management .............................................................................................51
9.1.1 User .........................................................................................................................51
9.1.2 Group.......................................................................................................................56
9.1.3 View.........................................................................................................................60
9.2 Change Password ...................................................................................................61
9.3 Lock Screen.............................................................................................................61

10 NE Configuration and Management ........................................................................63


10.1 Chassis View ...........................................................................................................63
10.2 Synchronizing NE ....................................................................................................64

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 3
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

10.3 NE Property Configuration.......................................................................................65


10.4 Warm Reboot NE ....................................................................................................66
10.5 Cold Reboot NE.......................................................................................................67
10.6 Shutting down NE....................................................................................................67
10.7 FTP Settings ............................................................................................................68
10.8 NE Software Management ......................................................................................69
10.9 MIB Management ....................................................................................................71
10.10 NE Time Setting ......................................................................................................72
10.11 NE Trap Destination Configuration..........................................................................73

11 SDH Configuration and Management .....................................................................74


11.1 Card Configuration and Management .....................................................................74
11.1.1 SDH Card Configuration and Management.............................................................74
11.1.2 Synchronizing the Card ...........................................................................................75
11.1.3 Delete Card..............................................................................................................76
11.1.4 Cold Reboot Card....................................................................................................76
11.2 SDH Port Configuration and Management..............................................................76
11.2.1 Port Configuration....................................................................................................77
11.2.2 Port Status ...............................................................................................................77
11.3 E1 Ports Property Configuration..............................................................................81
11.4 CC Configuration and Management........................................................................82
11.4.1 Querying Current Cross-Connection .......................................................................82
11.4.2 Adding a New Cross-Connection ............................................................................83
11.4.3 Deleting a Connection .............................................................................................83
11.5 TP Configuration and Management ........................................................................84
11.5.1 Querying Current Terminal Point.............................................................................84
11.5.2 TP Multiplexing Structure ........................................................................................86
11.6 Synchronization Management .................................................................................88
11.6.1 Global Settings ........................................................................................................89
11.6.2 Configuring the Timing Source of NE......................................................................90
11.6.3 Configuring the System Clock .................................................................................91
11.6.4 Configuring the Reference.......................................................................................92
11.7 EOW Configuration..................................................................................................94

12 Ethernet Configuration and Management ...............................................................95


12.1 Bridge Configuration................................................................................................95
12.2 LAN Card Configuration and Management .............................................................97
12.2.1 LAN Port Properties.................................................................................................98
12.2.2 VLAN Rate Limiting ...............................................................................................100
12.2.3 CoS Configuration .................................................................................................102
12.2.4 Priority Algorithm Configuration.............................................................................103
12.3 WAN Port Configuration ........................................................................................104
12.4 WAN Ports TP Structure........................................................................................108
12.5 VLAN Management ...............................................................................................108
12.6 Static MAC Address Configuration ........................................................................111
12.7 ACL Configuration .................................................................................................113
12.8 Static Multicast Configuration ................................................................................114
12.9 IGMP Snooping .....................................................................................................115

4 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

12.10 RSTP Configuration...............................................................................................117

13 RPR Configuration and Management ...................................................................119


13.1 RPR Station Configuration ....................................................................................119
13.1.1 RPR Station Basic Configuration ..........................................................................119
13.1.2 RPR Station Fairness Configuration .....................................................................121
13.1.3 RPR Station OAM Configuration ...........................................................................123
13.1.4 RPR Station Protection Configuration ...................................................................124
13.1.5 RPR Station Span Protection Switch Configuration..............................................124
13.2 RPR Client Port Configuration...............................................................................125
13.3 RPR WAN Port Configuration ...............................................................................127
13.4 RPR Static MultiCast configuration .......................................................................128
13.5 RPR Topology Information ....................................................................................130
13.6 RPR Service Configuration ...................................................................................131
13.6.1 Basic Information...................................................................................................132
13.6.2 Add Station ............................................................................................................132
13.7 RPR Service Management....................................................................................135
13.7.1 Service Detail ........................................................................................................136
13.7.2 Modify RPR Service ..............................................................................................138

14 Protection Management ........................................................................................140


14.1 CC 1+1 Protection .................................................................................................140
14.2 Equipment Protection ............................................................................................141
14.2.1 1+1 Equipment Protection .....................................................................................141
14.2.2 1:N Equipment Protection ....................................................................................144
14.3 SNCP Management...............................................................................................146
14.3.1 Viewing and Modifying SNCP ...............................................................................147
14.3.2 Creating SNCP ......................................................................................................149
14.3.3 Deleting SNCP ......................................................................................................149
14.3.4 Switching SNCP ....................................................................................................150
14.4 MSP Management.................................................................................................150
14.5 MSSPRing Management.......................................................................................153
14.5.1 Creating MSSPRing ..............................................................................................154
14.5.2 Delete a Ring.........................................................................................................157
14.5.3 Ring Property.........................................................................................................157

15 DCN Management.................................................................................................162
15.1 Change NE IP........................................................................................................162
15.2 Change Ethernet IP ...............................................................................................162
15.3 DCC Management.................................................................................................163
15.4 OSI Configuration ..................................................................................................164
15.5 GRE Tunnel Configuration ....................................................................................165
15.6 MGMT Port RIP Configuration ..............................................................................167
15.7 IP Route Configuration ..........................................................................................168
15.7.1 IP Interface ............................................................................................................168
15.7.2 IP Static Route.......................................................................................................169
15.7.3 IP Routing Table....................................................................................................170
15.8 OSPF.....................................................................................................................171
15.8.1 OSPF General .......................................................................................................172

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 5
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15.8.2 OSPF Areas...........................................................................................................173


15.8.3 OSPF Interfaces ....................................................................................................176
15.8.4 OSPF Interface Metrics .........................................................................................178
15.8.5 OSPF Neighbors ...................................................................................................179
15.9 Route Redistribution ..............................................................................................180

16 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................181
16.1 PRBS Test Management.......................................................................................181
16.1.1 Query Current PRBS Status of Ports ....................................................................181
16.1.2 Set PRBS Testing..................................................................................................182
16.1.3 Enable or Disable PRBS Test ...............................................................................182
16.2 Loop-back Test Management................................................................................183
16.2.1 Querying Loopback Status ....................................................................................183
16.2.2 Setting Loopback Test...........................................................................................183
16.3 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management.....................................................................184
16.4 LED Test................................................................................................................186

17 Performance Monitoring Management ..................................................................187


17.1 Overview of Performance Monitoring ....................................................................187
17.1.1 SDH Performance Monitoring................................................................................187
17.1.1.1 PM in Regeneration Section (G.829) ....................................................................187
17.1.1.2 PM in Multiplex Section (G.829) ............................................................................188
17.1.1.3 PM for HP/LP (High Order and Low Order Paths) (G.829) ...................................189
17.1.1.4 PM for Pointer Justification Counts at Administrative Unit (G.707).......................190
17.1.2 Data Performance Monitoring Parameters............................................................191
17.2 SDH Performance Monitoring................................................................................192
17.2.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................194
17.2.1.1 TP Filter .................................................................................................................194
17.2.1.2 Parameter Filter .....................................................................................................195
17.2.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................195
17.2.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................196
17.2.4 History SDH Performance .....................................................................................199
17.2.5 SDH Unavailiable Periods .....................................................................................200
17.3 Ethernet Performance Monitoring Configuration ...................................................201
17.3.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................203
17.3.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................205
17.3.3 5-Second Ethernet Performance ...........................................................................205
17.3.4 History Ethernet Performance ...............................................................................207
17.4 Ethernet VLAN Performance Monitoring Configuration ........................................207
17.4.1 Enable Setting .......................................................................................................208
17.4.1.1 Port and VLAN Filter..............................................................................................208
17.4.2 History Ethernet VLAN Performance.....................................................................209
17.4.2.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................210
17.4.3 5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance ................................................................211
17.5 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance ...........................................................................212
17.5.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................212
17.5.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................214
17.5.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................215

6 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.5.4 History E1 Bit Slip Performance ............................................................................216


17.6 PDH CRC Performance Monitoring.......................................................................216
17.6.1 Filter Setting ..........................................................................................................217
17.6.1.1 Port Filter ...............................................................................................................218
17.6.1.2 Parameter Filter.....................................................................................................219
17.6.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................219
17.6.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................220
17.6.4 History PDH CRC Performance ............................................................................221
17.6.5 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods ...........................................................................223
17.7 RPR Span Performance Monitoring Configuration ...............................................224
17.7.1 Filter.......................................................................................................................225
17.7.2 Edit Monitored Parameter .....................................................................................227
17.7.3 RPR Span History Value .......................................................................................228
17.8 RPR MAC Client Performance Monitoring Configuration......................................230
17.8.1 Filter.......................................................................................................................230
17.8.2 Edit Monitored Parameter .....................................................................................232
17.8.3 RPR MAC Client History Value .............................................................................232

18 Alarm and Event Management..............................................................................235


18.1 Overview of Alarms ...............................................................................................235
18.2 NE Alarms .............................................................................................................235
18.2.1 Current Alarms ......................................................................................................235
18.2.2 Viewing Active Alarms ...........................................................................................236
18.2.3 Reviewing the Current Alarms...............................................................................237
18.2.4 Viewing Alarm Detail .............................................................................................238
18.2.5 Clearing Alarms .....................................................................................................238
18.2.6 Alarm Search.........................................................................................................239
18.2.7 History Alarms .......................................................................................................239
18.3 LED Indicators .......................................................................................................242
18.4 Exporting Alarms ...................................................................................................243
18.4.1 Exporting Active Alarms to a File ..........................................................................243
18.4.2 Printing Active Alarms ...........................................................................................245
18.5 Configuring Fault Management .............................................................................246
18.5.1 Audio Alarm Configuration ....................................................................................246
18.5.2 Alarm Type List Management ...............................................................................247
18.6 Alarm Configuration for Single NE ........................................................................249
18.6.1 AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration.................................................................................249
18.6.2 Alarm Inhibit Configuration ....................................................................................250
18.6.3 Alarm Out Configuration........................................................................................251
18.6.4 AIS/RDI Alarm configuration .................................................................................251
18.6.5 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration.....................................................................252
18.6.6 MDI/MDO Configuration ........................................................................................253
18.7 Displaying the Node Event Log .............................................................................254
18.7.1 Interpreting the Node Event Log ...........................................................................255
18.7.2 Management Events..............................................................................................255
18.7.3 Hardware Events ...................................................................................................256
18.7.4 Software Events ....................................................................................................256
18.7.5 Event Search .........................................................................................................257

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 7
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

19 Resource and Database Management..................................................................259


19.1 NE Usage Statistics...............................................................................................259

20 How To ..................................................................................................................260
20.1 Creating a TU12 Cross-Connection between STM-16 and STM-1.......................260
20.2 Creating Timing Synchronized Network ................................................................265
20.3 Configure Layer 2 100Mbps Ethernet Service ......................................................271
20.4 Monitoring One STM-16 Port Current Performance..............................................279
20.5 Creating Multiplex-Section Protection between Two NEs.....................................283
20.6 Creating SNCP Using 2 Ports of STM-1 ...............................................................284
20.7 Creating MSSPRing Protection for STM-16 Ring..................................................288
20.8 Creating 1+1 Equipment Protection for Electrical STM-1 Card.............................291
20.9 Creating RPR Service Station ...............................................................................293

21 Abbreviation...........................................................................................................298
22 Index ......................................................................................................................300

8 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Illustrations
Fig. 2.1 TNMS-M Series Products .....................................................................................22
Fig. 6.1 Open Hyper Terminal ...........................................................................................29
Fig. 6.2 Hyper Terminal--Connection Description .............................................................30
Fig. 6.3 Hyper Terminal--Connect To ................................................................................30
Fig. 6.4 Hyper Terminal--COM1 Properties.......................................................................31
Fig. 6.5 CLI Window--Welcome to Login ...........................................................................31
Fig. 6.6 Main Menu ............................................................................................................32
Fig. 6.7 User Table ............................................................................................................32
Fig. 6.8 Edit a Given User..................................................................................................33
Fig. 6.9 IP Address Configuration......................................................................................33
Fig. 6.10 Add Static Route Information................................................................................34
Fig. 6.11 Setup Wizard Welcome Screen............................................................................35
Fig. 6.12 License Agreement...............................................................................................35
Fig. 6.13 Select Destination Location ..................................................................................36
Fig. 6.14 Select Start Menu Folder ......................................................................................36
Fig. 6.15 Select Additional Tasks ........................................................................................37
Fig. 6.16 Ready to Install .....................................................................................................37
Fig. 6.17 Installing................................................................................................................38
Fig. 6.18 Exit Setup..............................................................................................................38
Fig. 6.19 Completing the Setup ...........................................................................................39
Fig. 6.20 Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT .......................................................39
Fig. 6.21 Confirm Window for Uninstall ...............................................................................39
Fig. 6.22 Uninstall Status.....................................................................................................40
Fig. 6.23 Completing Uninstalling Process..........................................................................40
Fig. 7.1 Desktop Icon.........................................................................................................41
Fig. 7.2 Start LCT from Start Menu....................................................................................41
Fig. 7.3 LCT Login Window ...............................................................................................42
Fig. 7.4 LCT GUI................................................................................................................43
Fig. 8.1 Main Window ........................................................................................................44
Fig. 9.1 Security Menu.......................................................................................................51
Fig. 9.2 Account Management...........................................................................................51
Fig. 9.3 Create New User ..................................................................................................52
Fig. 9.4 New User Added View..........................................................................................53
Fig. 9.5 Select Groups .......................................................................................................53
Fig. 9.6 User Profile ...........................................................................................................54
Fig. 9.7 Setting User Profile...............................................................................................54
Fig. 9.8 Permitted Operations for User ..............................................................................55
Fig. 9.9 Operation Logs for User .......................................................................................56
Fig. 9.10 Reset Passwords..................................................................................................56
Fig. 9.11 Create New Group................................................................................................57
Fig. 9.12 New Group Added View .......................................................................................57
Fig. 9.13 Select Users .........................................................................................................58
Fig. 9.14 Permitted operations for Group ............................................................................59
Fig. 9.15 Assign Group Permissions ...................................................................................60
Fig. 9.16 Change Password ................................................................................................61
Fig. 9.17 Lock Screen..........................................................................................................61
Fig. 9.18 LockScreen Config ...............................................................................................62
Fig. 10.1 Chassis View ........................................................................................................63
Fig. 10.2 Refresh Chassis ...................................................................................................64

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 9
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 10.3 Synchronize NE ................................................................................................... 65


Fig. 10.4 NE Properties....................................................................................................... 65
Fig. 10.5 Warm Reboot NE................................................................................................. 66
Fig. 10.6 Cold Reboot NE ................................................................................................... 67
Fig. 10.7 Shutdown NE ....................................................................................................... 67
Fig. 10.8 Shutdown Information .......................................................................................... 67
Fig. 10.9 FTP Settings ........................................................................................................ 68
Fig. 10.10 FTP Root............................................................................................................ 68
Fig. 10.11 NE Software Management................................................................................... 69
Fig. 10.12 FTP Setting .......................................................................................................... 70
Fig. 10.13 NE Software Switch Result Windows .................................................................. 70
Fig. 10.14 MIB Management <Upload> tab.......................................................................... 71
Fig. 10.15 MIB Management <Download> tab ..................................................................... 71
Fig. 10.16 NE Time Settings ................................................................................................. 72
Fig. 10.17 NE Destination ..................................................................................................... 73
Fig. 10.18 Confirmation for Delete ........................................................................................ 73
Fig. 11.1 Card Properties.................................................................................................... 74
Fig. 11.2 Synchronize Card ................................................................................................ 75
Fig. 11.3 SDH Port Properties ............................................................................................ 76
Fig. 11.4 Advanced Port Status Information ....................................................................... 78
Fig. 11.5 E1 Port Properties................................................................................................ 81
Fig. 11.6 Cross-Connect Management............................................................................... 82
Fig. 11.7 Create Cross-Connect ......................................................................................... 83
Fig. 11.8 Confirmation for deleting Cross-Connections...................................................... 84
Fig. 11.9 TP Configuration (View 1 - As Presented)........................................................... 84
Fig. 11.10 TP Configuration (View 2 - Engaged) .................................................................. 85
Fig. 11.11 TP Multiplexing Structure Query.......................................................................... 86
Fig. 11.12 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 1........................................................................ 86
Fig. 11.13 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 2........................................................................ 87
Fig. 11.14 Modify Mapping.................................................................................................... 87
Fig. 11.15 Synchronization Management ............................................................................. 89
Fig. 11.16 Global Settings..................................................................................................... 89
Fig. 11.17 Station Clock Settings Reference Time IN .......................................................... 90
Fig. 11.18 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out ........................................................ 91
Fig. 11.19 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out (Clock Out Reference) ................... 91
Fig. 11.20 System Clock ....................................................................................................... 92
Fig. 11.21 Timing Source Reference Properties................................................................... 93
Fig. 11.22 EOW Config Window ........................................................................................... 94
Fig. 12.1 Bridge Properties ................................................................................................. 95
Fig. 12.2 LAN Port Property Configuration (1).................................................................... 98
Fig. 12.3 LAN Port Property Configuration (2).................................................................. 100
Fig. 12.4 VLAN Rate Limit Configuration.......................................................................... 101
Fig. 12.5 Add VLAN Rate Limit ......................................................................................... 101
Fig. 12.6 VLAN+Port CoS Configuration .......................................................................... 102
Fig. 12.7 Add VLAN CoS .................................................................................................. 103
Fig. 12.8 Egress Priority Weight Configuration................................................................... 104
Fig. 12.9 Modify Priority Weight .......................................................................................... 104
Fig. 12.10 WAN Port Configuration (1) ............................................................................... 105
Fig. 12.11 WAN Port Configuration (2) ............................................................................... 105
Fig. 12.12 Bandwidth Management .................................................................................... 106
Fig. 12.13 Summary of Virtual Containers.......................................................................... 107

10 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.14 WAN Ports TP Structure.....................................................................................108


Fig. 12.15 VLAN Management ............................................................................................109
Fig. 12.16 VLAN Configuration Based on VLAN .................................................................110
Fig. 12.17 VLAN Configuration Based on Ports ..................................................................111
Fig. 12.18 Static MAC Address Configuration .....................................................................112
Fig. 12.19 Add MAC Address ..............................................................................................112
Fig. 12.20 ACL Configuration ..............................................................................................113
Fig. 12.21 Add ACL..............................................................................................................114
Fig. 12.22 Static Multicast Configuration .............................................................................114
Fig. 12.23 Add MAC Address ..............................................................................................115
Fig. 12.24 IGMP Snooping-IP Multicast Group ...................................................................116
Fig. 12.25 IGMP Snooping-Mac Multicast Group ................................................................116
Fig. 12.26 IGMP Snooping- Vlan Multicast Router..............................................................117
Fig. 12.27 RSTP Properties Configuration ..........................................................................118
Fig. 12.28 Port RSTP Configuration ....................................................................................118
Fig. 13.1 Open RPR Station Configuration........................................................................119
Fig. 13.2 RPR Station Configuration..................................................................................120
Fig. 13.3 Basic Fairness Configuration..............................................................................121
Fig. 13.4 Advanced Fairness Configuration ......................................................................122
Fig. 13.5 OAM Configuration .............................................................................................123
Fig. 13.6 RPR Station Protection Configuration ................................................................124
Fig. 13.7 Span Protection Switch.......................................................................................125
Fig. 13.8 RPR Client Port Config .......................................................................................126
Fig. 13.9 RPR WAN Port Config........................................................................................127
Fig. 13.10 Bandwidth Configuration.....................................................................................128
Fig. 13.11 Static MultiCast Configuration ............................................................................129
Fig. 13.12 Add/Modify Static MultiCast................................................................................130
Fig. 13.13 RPR Topo Table .................................................................................................131
Fig. 13.14 RPR Service Configuration.................................................................................132
Fig. 13.15 Add RPR Service................................................................................................133
Fig. 13.16 RPR Service Station Configuration ....................................................................133
Fig. 13.17 Rate Limit Pre-Configuration ..............................................................................134
Fig. 13.18 RPR Service Management .................................................................................135
Fig. 13.19 RPR Service Management- Query reslut ...........................................................136
Fig. 13.20 Service Detail......................................................................................................137
Fig. 13.21 Modify RPR Service............................................................................................138
Fig. 13.22 RPR Service Station Configuration ....................................................................138
Fig. 14.1 CC 1+1 Protection ..............................................................................................140
Fig. 14.2 Equipment Protection Group Management ........................................................141
Fig. 14.3 EPG External Command ....................................................................................142
Fig. 14.4 See detail of EPG ..............................................................................................143
Fig. 14.5 Create EPG ........................................................................................................143
Fig. 14.6 1:N Equipment Protection Group Management..................................................144
Fig. 14.7 1:N EPG External Command..............................................................................145
Fig. 14.8 See detail of 1:N EPG........................................................................................146
Fig. 14.9 Creat 1:N EPG....................................................................................................146
Fig. 14.10 SNCP Management............................................................................................147
Fig. 14.11 View/Modify SNCP .............................................................................................148
Fig. 14.12 Create SNCP ......................................................................................................149
Fig. 14.13 Delete SNCP ......................................................................................................150
Fig. 14.14 SNCP Switch ......................................................................................................150

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 11
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.15 MSP Management ............................................................................................. 151


Fig. 14.16 MSP Property..................................................................................................... 152
Fig. 14.17 External Commands .......................................................................................... 152
Fig. 14.18 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group ............................................ 153
Fig. 14.19 MSSPRing Management ................................................................................... 154
Fig. 14.20 Set Ring Property............................................................................................... 154
Fig. 14.21 Warning Window................................................................................................ 155
Fig. 14.22 Create MSSPRing and Link Configuration ........................................................ 155
Fig. 14.23 Set NEs in Ring.................................................................................................. 155
Fig. 14.24 Create Ring-Select Link..................................................................................... 156
Fig. 14.25 Create MSSPRing Confirming ........................................................................... 156
Fig. 14.26 Create MSSPRing Created................................................................................ 157
Fig. 14.27 Ring Properties- Protection Details.................................................................... 158
Fig. 14.28 Ring Properties- Switch ..................................................................................... 159
Fig. 14.29 Ring Properties- Mapping .................................................................................. 160
Fig. 14.30 Ring Properties- Squelch................................................................................... 161
Fig. 15.1 Change NE IP ...................................................................................................... 162
Fig. 15.2 Configure Ethernet IP .......................................................................................... 162
Fig. 15.3 Port DCC Management........................................................................................ 163
Fig. 15.4 OSI Configuration .............................................................................................. 164
Fig. 15.5 Edit OSI properities.......................................................................................... 165
Fig. 15.6 GRE Tunnel Configuration................................................................................. 166
Fig. 15.7 Edit GRE Tunnel ............................................................................................... 167
Fig. 15.8 MGMT Port RIP Configuration........................................................................... 167
Fig. 15.9 IP Interface......................................................................................................... 168
Fig. 15.10 IP Static Route ................................................................................................. 169
Fig. 15.11 Edit IP Static Route.......................................................................................... 170
Fig. 15.12 Add IP Static Route............................................................................................ 170
Fig. 15.13 IP Routing Table ................................................................................................ 171
Fig. 15.14 OSPF Submenu................................................................................................. 172
Fig. 15.15 OSPF General ................................................................................................... 172
Fig. 15.16 OSPF Area......................................................................................................... 174
Fig. 15.17 Add OSPF Area ................................................................................................. 175
Fig. 15.18 Edit OSPF Area ................................................................................................. 176
Fig. 15.19 OSPF Interface .................................................................................................. 177
Fig. 15.20 OSPF Interface Metric ....................................................................................... 178
Fig. 15.21 OSPF Neighbor.................................................................................................. 179
Fig. 15.22 Route Redistribution ......................................................................................... 180
Fig. 16.1 PRBS Test Management ................................................................................... 181
Fig. 16.2 PRBS Setting ..................................................................................................... 182
Fig. 16.3 Loopback Test ................................................................................................... 183
Fig. 16.4 Lookback Test Configure................................................................................... 184
Fig. 16.5 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management ................................................................. 185
Fig. 16.6 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 1.............................................................................. 185
Fig. 16.7 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 2.............................................................................. 186
Fig. 16.8 LED Test ............................................................................................................ 186
Fig. 17.1 SDH Current Performance................................................................................. 193
Fig. 17.2 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 194
Fig. 17.3 Select Terminal Point......................................................................................... 195
Fig. 17.4 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter ............................................................ 196
Fig. 17.5 Current SDH Performance(Right-click menu) ................................................... 197

12 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.6 Threshold Setting................................................................................................197


Fig. 17.7 Warning window .................................................................................................197
Fig. 17.8 SDH History Performance ..................................................................................199
Fig. 17.9 SDH Unavailiable Periods ..................................................................................200
Fig. 17.10 Select Terminal Point........................................................................................200
Fig. 17.11 Edit Setting .......................................................................................................201
Fig. 17.12 Ethernet Current Statistics................................................................................202
Fig. 17.13 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................204
Fig. 17.14 Select Port ..........................................................................................................204
Fig. 17.15 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor .............................................................205
Fig. 17.16 5 Second Ethernet Statistics ..............................................................................206
Fig. 17.17 Select Port ..........................................................................................................206
Fig. 17.18 Ethernet History Statistics...................................................................................207
Fig. 17.19 Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics .......................................................................208
Fig. 17.20 Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM ...........................................................................208
Fig. 17.21 Select Port and VLAN.........................................................................................209
Fig. 17.22 Ethernet VLAN Statistics ....................................................................................209
Fig. 17.23 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................210
Fig. 17.24 Select Port and VLAN.........................................................................................210
Fig. 17.25 5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance..............................................................211
Fig. 17.26 Select Port and VLAN.........................................................................................211
Fig. 17.27 Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance ........................................................................212
Fig. 17.28 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................213
Fig. 17.29 Select Port ..........................................................................................................213
Fig. 17.30 Selected Ports ....................................................................................................214
Fig. 17.31 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor .............................................................214
Fig. 17.32 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance(Right-click menu) ...........................................215
Fig. 17.33 Threshold Setting................................................................................................215
Fig. 17.34 Warning window .................................................................................................216
Fig. 17.35 History E1 Bit Slip Performance .........................................................................216
Fig. 17.36 PDH CRC Current Performance.........................................................................217
Fig. 17.37 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................218
Fig. 17.38 Select Port ..........................................................................................................218
Fig. 17.39 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor .............................................................219
Fig. 17.40 Current PDH CRC Performance(Right-click menu)............................................220
Fig. 17.41 Threshold Setting................................................................................................220
Fig. 17.42 Warning window .................................................................................................221
Fig. 17.43 History PDH CRC Performance .........................................................................221
Fig. 17.44 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................222
Fig. 17.45 Select Port ..........................................................................................................222
Fig. 17.46 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods .........................................................................223
Fig. 17.47 Select Port ..........................................................................................................223
Fig. 17.48 Edit Setting .........................................................................................................224
Fig. 17.49 RPR Span Current PM .......................................................................................225
Fig. 17.50 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................226
Fig. 17.51 Select Span ........................................................................................................226
Fig. 17.52 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter .............................................................227
Fig. 17.53 RPR Span History Performance Value...............................................................228
Fig. 17.54 Select Parameter ................................................................................................229
Fig. 17.55 Select SPAN .......................................................................................................229
Fig. 17.56 Current RPR MAC Client Performance ..............................................................230

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 13
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.57 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 231


Fig. 17.58 Select Client....................................................................................................... 231
Fig. 17.59 Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring........................................................ 232
Fig. 17.60 RPR MAC Client History Performance Value .................................................... 233
Fig. 17.61 Select Parameter ............................................................................................... 233
Fig. 17.62 Select Client....................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 18.1 Open Active Alarms from Main Menu ................................................................ 236
Fig. 18.2 Open Active Alarms from Right-click Menu ....................................................... 236
Fig. 18.3 Alarm Count by Severity .................................................................................... 237
Fig. 18.4 Active Alarms ..................................................................................................... 237
Fig. 18.5 Alarm Detail ....................................................................................................... 238
Fig. 18.6 Clear Alarm ........................................................................................................ 238
Fig. 18.7 Alarm Search ..................................................................................................... 239
Fig. 18.8 Open History Alarms from Main Menu............................................................... 240
Fig. 18.9 Open History Alarms from Right-click Menu...................................................... 240
Fig. 18.10 History Alarms.................................................................................................... 240
Fig. 18.11 Alarm Search ..................................................................................................... 241
Fig. 18.12 Alarm Source Config.......................................................................................... 242
Fig. 18.13 Active Alarm Search Result ............................................................................... 242
Fig. 18.14 Report Alarms .................................................................................................... 243
Fig. 18.15 Report Alarms Preview ...................................................................................... 244
Fig. 18.16 Save File ............................................................................................................ 244
Fig. 18.17 Print Alarms ....................................................................................................... 245
Fig. 18.18 Print Alarms Preview.......................................................................................... 245
Fig. 18.19 Print Setup ......................................................................................................... 246
Fig. 18.20 Open Alarm Audio Configure from main menu.................................................. 246
Fig. 18.21 Audio Alarm Configuration................................................................................. 247
Fig. 18.22 Open Alarm Type Management from Main Menu ............................................. 247
Fig. 18.23 Alarm Type List Management............................................................................ 248
Fig. 18.24 Modify User Defined Severity of Alarm.............................................................. 248
Fig. 18.25 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration ......................................................... 249
Fig. 18.26 Alarm Inhibit Configuration – for port ................................................................. 250
Fig. 18.27 Alarm Out Configuration .................................................................................... 251
Fig. 18.28 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration ......................................................... 252
Fig. 18.29 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration ................................................................. 252
Fig. 18.30 MDI Configuration .............................................................................................. 253
Fig. 18.31 MDO Configuration ............................................................................................ 254
Fig. 18.32 Node Event Log ................................................................................................. 255
Fig. 18.33 Event Search ..................................................................................................... 257
Fig. 18.34 Event Search Result .......................................................................................... 258
Fig. 19.1 NE SDH Resource Usage Statistics .................................................................. 259
Fig. 20.1 TP Multiplexing Structure................................................................................... 260
Fig. 20.2 Query Result ...................................................................................................... 260
Fig. 20.3 Expanding Tree Graph ...................................................................................... 261
Fig. 20.4 Mapping AU4 to TU12 ....................................................................................... 261
Fig. 20.5 Result of Mapping .............................................................................................. 262
Fig. 20.6 Mapping TU12 to AU4 ....................................................................................... 262
Fig. 20.7 Cross-Connect Management Menu................................................................... 263
Fig. 20.8 Cross-Connect Management............................................................................. 263
Fig. 20.9 Create Cross-Connect ....................................................................................... 264
Fig. 20.10 Create Cross-Connect window .......................................................................... 265

14 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.11 Three (3) Node Ring ...........................................................................................266


Fig. 20.12 Synchronization Management ............................................................................266
Fig. 20.13 Synchronization Management ............................................................................267
Fig. 20.14 Station Clock Setting ..........................................................................................267
Fig. 20.15 Timing Source Reference Properties .................................................................268
Fig. 20.16 Remove Timing Source Reference ....................................................................268
Fig. 20.17 System Clock......................................................................................................269
Fig. 20.18 Timing Results ....................................................................................................269
Fig. 20.19 Synchronization Management ............................................................................270
Fig. 20.20 Timing Source Reference Management.............................................................270
Fig. 20.21 Synchronization Management ............................................................................271
Fig. 20.22 Bridge Configuration Tab....................................................................................272
Fig. 20.23 Bridges Properties ..............................................................................................272
Fig. 20.24 LAN Port Property Configuration ........................................................................273
Fig. 20.25 WAN Port Configuration .....................................................................................274
Fig. 20.26 Bandwidth Management .....................................................................................275
Fig. 20.27 VLAN Management ............................................................................................276
Fig. 20.28 VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................276
Fig. 20.29 VLAN Management: Query Result .....................................................................277
Fig. 20.30 Create Cross-Connect ........................................................................................278
Fig. 20.31 Cross-Connect Management..............................................................................279
Fig. 20.32 Current SDH Performance Tab ..........................................................................279
Fig. 20.33 SDH Current Performance..................................................................................280
Fig. 20.34 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................280
Fig. 20.35 Select Terminal Point..........................................................................................281
Fig. 20.36 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................282
Fig. 20.37 SDH Current Performance..................................................................................282
Fig. 20.38 Point-to-point System .........................................................................................283
Fig. 20.39 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management ...................................283
Fig. 20.40 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group .............................................284
Fig. 20.41 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management ...................................284
Fig. 20.42 SNCP Example...................................................................................................285
Fig. 20.43 SNCP Management............................................................................................285
Fig. 20.44 Create and Config SNCP....................................................................................286
Fig. 20.45 SNCP Protection of NE A ...................................................................................287
Fig. 20.46 SNCP Switch ......................................................................................................287
Fig. 20.47 MSSPRing Management ....................................................................................288
Fig. 20.48 Set Ring Property ...............................................................................................288
Fig. 20.49 Warning Window.................................................................................................289
Fig. 20.50 Create Ring.........................................................................................................289
Fig. 20.51 Select Link Port...................................................................................................289
Fig. 20.52 Create Ring – NEs and links Successful Confugured ........................................290
Fig. 20.53 Confirm to add protection ...................................................................................290
Fig. 20.54 MSSPRING List ..................................................................................................290
Fig. 20.55 Equipment Protection Group Management ........................................................291
Fig. 20.56 Create EPG ........................................................................................................291
Fig. 20.57 Create EPG – Successfully ................................................................................292
Fig. 20.58 Enable EPG ........................................................................................................292
Fig. 20.59 Enable EPG – Successfully ................................................................................292
Fig. 20.60 Create EPG – Finish...........................................................................................292
Fig. 20.61 RPR Service Configuration.................................................................................293

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 15
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.62 Add RPR Service ............................................................................................... 294


Fig. 20.63 RPR Service Station Configuration.................................................................... 294
Fig. 20.64 Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration......................................................................... 295
Fig. 20.65 Add RPR Service Station – Finish ..................................................................... 296
Fig. 20.66 RPR Service Management ................................................................................ 296
Fig. 20.67 RPR Service Management – Query Result ....................................................... 297
Fig. 20.68 Delete RPR Service – Confirm Window ............................................................ 297

16 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Tables
Tab.1.1 Third Party Software Used in Network Management System ..............................21
Tab. 3.1 Feature List..........................................................................................................26
Tab. 4.1 Minimum Hardware Requirement of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT...........27
Tab. 8.1 Main Menu Structure ...........................................................................................48
Tab. 8.2 SDH Card Submenu Structure ............................................................................48
Tab. 8.3 CC Card Submenu Structure...............................................................................49
Tab. 8.4 SC Card Submenu Structure...............................................................................49
Tab. 8.5 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- ethernet/Tcard ............................................49
Tab. 8.6 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- ethernet/L2 card .........................................50
Tab. 8.7 RPR Card Submenu Structure ............................................................................50
Tab. 10.1 NE Properties ......................................................................................................66
Tab. 10.2 NE Software Management Window Field Description ........................................69
Tab. 11.1 Card Identification................................................................................................75
Tab. 11.2 Port Configuration................................................................................................77
Tab. 11.3 Port Status...........................................................................................................77
Tab. 11.4 Port Status-advanced ............................................................................................79
Tab. 11.5 value of parameters for SFP..................................................................................80
Tab. 11.6 TP Management Parameters ..............................................................................85
Tab. 11.7 Tributary(Trib#) to KLM to Timeslot(TS#) Numbers Mapping .............................88
Tab. 11.8 Timing Source Management Time IN Window Parameters ................................90
Tab. 12.1 Bandwidth limitations for Ethernet cards and WAN ports .................................107
Tab. 12.2 Type of VCs for Ethernet cards .........................................................................108
Tab. 14.1 SNCP Properties ...............................................................................................148
Tab. 16.1 PRBS Test Pattern ............................................................................................182
Tab. 17.1 Regenerator Section SES threshold xx% (for BIP-8)........................................188
Tab. 17.2 MS Far End Errored Blocks Size- STM-16........................................................188
Tab. 17.3 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second ..............................188
Tab. 17.4 Defects resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second..................................188
Tab. 17.5 Multiplex Section SES threshold xx% (For BIP-1) ............................................189
Tab. 17.6 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second ..............................189
Tab. 17.7 Defects Resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second ................................189
Tab. 17.8 Path Overhead Section SES Threshold xx% (For BIP-2, BIP-8) ......................190
Tab. 17.9 PM Management Functions ..............................................................................193
Tab. 17.10 Default Value and Value Range for a Fixed 15-minute Period .........................198
Tab. 17.11 Default value and Value Range for a Fixed 24-hour Period..............................199
Tab. 17.12 Maximum Records number of History Performance .........................................199
Tab. 17.13 Primary Ethernet PM Function ..........................................................................202
Tab. 17.14 Frame Size Ranges for Different Parameters ...................................................203
Tab. 17.15 PM Management Functions ..............................................................................217
Tab. 17.16 Frame Size Range for Parameters....................................................................227
Tab. 18.1 Active Alarms Information..................................................................................238
Tab. 18.2 LED Status ........................................................................................................243
Tab. 18.3 AIS/RDI Alarm Tree Nodes Selection Logic......................................................250
Tab. 18.4 Management Events..........................................................................................256
Tab. 18.5 Hardware Events ...............................................................................................256
Tab. 18.6 Software Events ................................................................................................257

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 17
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1 Notes on this Documentation

1.1 Customer Documentation


The Customer Documentation of the SURPASS hiT 7060 comprises the following
descriptions and manuals:

• Technical Manual
The Technical Manual gives an overview of the application, performance features,
interfaces, and functions of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060. It also contains the most
important technical data.

i The Technical Manual does not contain any instructions to operate the product.

• Installation and Testing Manual


The Installation and Test Manual ITMN contains instructions on mounting, connecting,
and commissioning the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060, as well as connecting and
commissioning the LCT operation terminals.

• Troubleshooting Manual
The Troubleshooting Manual provides information about the supported alarm list and
troubleshooting procedures for the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060.

• TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT User Manual


The LCT User Manual provides information about the LCT (features, configuration,
installation, etc.) and how to operate, monitor, and maintain the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT
7060 using the Element Manager software (Application Software) running on the LCT.

Besides the LCT User Manual, the Online Help provided for the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT
i software is an extremely useful reference for the operator.
Note: PhotonicVision™ SNM and MetroWave serial products only support English
environment, so SNM and MW serial LCTs may run abnormally in other language operation
system.

1.2 Complementary Documents


In addition to the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 customer documentation listed in Chapter
1.1, there is further documentation:

• TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 Release Note


This document identifies the specific version of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 and
provides information on HW, SW, LCT components and the limitations of the release as
well as important notes concerning the customer documentation.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 19
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1.3 Symbols Used in the Customer Documentation

1.3.1 Symbol for Warnings


This symbol identifies notes which, if ignored, can result in personal injury or in permanent
! damage to the equipment.

1.3.2 Symbols for Notes

i This symbol identifies notes providing information which extends beyond the immediate
context.

This symbol identifies cross references to other chapters in this manual or cross references
to other manuals.

Help This symbol refers to the online help system of the Element Manager software.

1.3.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs


Menu options from pop-up menus or inputs to be made by the user (texts, commands) are
displayed consecutively in their hierarchical sequence in pointed brackets:
<Menu> <Menu item> <Command text> <Parameter> etc.

1.4 Notes on Licensed Software


This documentation refers to software products which were taken over from other companies
as licenses.
Should problems arise, the user should contact Siemens AG as the licensee and not the
relevant licenser.

1.5 Other 3rd Party Software License Agreements


This product includes software licensed from other 3rd Party Software. Such software is
protected by copyright as provided in the proprietary notices included with the software.

License Version License From Web-Addres


Name Number Type
JDK1.4.2 1.4.2 Sun Licenses Sun www.sun.com
Microsystems
Java Help 1.4.2 Sun Licenses Sun www.sun.com
Microsystems
Apache XML 1.2 Apache Apache www.apache.org
License
Apache Log4j 1.2.10 Apache Apache www.apache.org
License
Phoenix FTP 0.9 Apache Apache www.apache.org
Server License
Jetty Web 4.2.24 Apache Apache jetty.mortbay.org/jetty/
server License
Inno Setup 5.1.2 Inno_license Sorden www.jrsoftware.org
Russell's
Software

20 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

JClass6.1 6.1 commercial Sitraka www.sitraka.com


Kodo JDO 3.3.2 commercial SolarMetric Inc www.solarmetric.com
JacORB 2.2.3 GNU LGPL jacorb.org www.jacorb.org
Jloox 3.0 3.0 commercial Engenuity Tech www.engenuitytech.com
SNMP4J 1.5 Apache SNMP4J.ORG www.snmp4j.org
License
DOM4J 1.5 BSD Style DOM4J.ORG dom4j.org
Licenses
Skin Look & 1.2.12 SKIN License L2FGROD www.l2fprod.com
Feel
Hsql 1.7.3 Hsql_license HSQL DB www.hsqldb.org
Jboss-JMX 3.2.6 LGPL JBOSS Inc. www.jboss.org

Tab.1.1 Third Party Software Used in Network Management System

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 21
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

2 Introduction
TNMS-M series products are network management systems which are used to manage and
maintain SURPASS MSTP network elements.

The TNMS-M series network management system products include the TNMS-M LCT and
the TNMS-M. (See Fig. 2.1)

Other Vendor’s OSS

CORBA/TMF814

NCI
TNMS-M

SNMP
TNMS-M LCT

SNMP

SURPASS NETWORK ELEMENTs


(hiT 7060HC, 7060, 7030, 7020…)

Fig. 2.1 TNMS-M Series Products

TNMS-M LCT (Local Craft Terminal) provides an NE level TNMS-M based management
function and GUI. One TNMS-M LCT application can only connect and manage one NE at
one time. The interface between TNMS-M LCT and NE is TNMS-M based. Different types of
network elements correspond to different types of LCTs, which are mainly used for on-site
management and maintenances.
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is an element management system for a single NE,
which is designed to provide comprehensive fault, configuration, and performance
management functions for the SURPASS hiT 7060 product line.

i Note: The latest 7060 R3.x LCT can manage all old 7060 R3.x NEs, but can not manage any
7060 R4.x NEs (4.x, 3.x refer to release versions, such as 4.0, 3.3, etc).

22 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Slots SC CC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC EC EC EC EC PWR F
1 1 3 4 5 7 9 11 1 2 3 4 1 A
to to to to to to to N
CC LC LC LC LC EC PWR
Cards 2 2 6 8 10 6 2
SC √
PWR √
FAN √
CC √
1xSTM-16 √ √ √ √ √ √
4xSTM- 4/1 √ √ √ √ √ √
2xSTM-1 √ √ √ √ √
4xSTM-1E (W/P) √ √ √ √
4xSTM-1E EC √ √ √
3xE3/DS3 (W/P) √ √ √ √
3xE3/DS3 EC √ √ √
63xE1 (W/P) √ √
63xE1 EC √
63xE1/R (W/P) √ √
63xE1/R EC √
2xGE+8FE/A √ √ √ √ √ √
2xGE+8FE RPR √ √ √ √ √ √
2xGE T √ √ √ √ √ √
8xFET √ √ √ √ √
6xFE /L2 √ √ √ √ √
OA √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Tab 2.1 Card Position of hiT_7060_3.4

i Note: 4XSTM1E and 3E3/DS3 cards can only be plugged through one of the following ways:
4XSTM1E
Protection Pair Protection Pair Protection Pair
1 2 3
Board Name
(3 slots) (3 slots) (3 slots)
Allowable Slots Allowable Slots Allowable Slots
4XSTM1E EC EC3 EC2 EC1
4× STM1E
LC1 LC2 LC5 LC6 LC3 LC4
(W/P)
Tab 2.2 4× STM-1E (W/P) allowable slots

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 23
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

3E3/DS3
Protection Pair Protection Pair Protection Pair
1 2 3
Board Name
(3 slots) (3 slots) (3 slots)
Allowable Slots Allowable Slots Allowable Slots
3× E3/DS3 EC EC3 EC2 EC1
3×E3/DS3
LC1 LC2 LC5 LC6 LC3 LC4
(W/P)
Tab 2.3 3× E3/DS3 (W/P) allowable slots

24 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

3 Features
The main features of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT features are listed in Tab. 3.1.

Feature Description
Java-Based User Interface • Java-based user interface to connect NEs
• A Chassis View showing the front faceplate of the
equipment
• Color-coded LEDs to indicate NE status
Consistency and Data • Uploads data from the actual NE to update the
Synchronization management information for the NE in the LCT
• Ensures all status and data in the LCT are consistent
with the actual NE
Network Element Control • Enables NE software updates to be downloaded from
the LCT
• Redundant images of the embedded software are
stored in an NE, one active and one backup which
can be switched and activated by the LCT
• NE warm reboot and cold reboot can be controlled by
the LCT
Configuration Management • View/synchronize/delete/modify Circuit-pack
attributes
• View/synchronize/modify port attributes
• TP configuration and management, including
viewing/synchronizing/modifying TP attributes, and
TP multiplexing structure configuration
• SDH Cross-Connect configuration and management
• Timing configuration and management, including
selecting the timing reference for system clock,
modifying/viewing timing reference of the NE’s
system clock, and configuring the timing reference for
station clock
• Virtual concatenation configuration and management
• LCAS configuration
• Ethernet VLAN configuration
• Ethernet Class of Service configuration
• Rapid spanning trees management
• Rate limiting configuration for the Ethernet port
• Broadcast storm control
• Multicast management
• IP route configuration
• OSPF parameters configuration
• OSI-Light parameters configuration
Protection and Redundancy • Supports Cross-Connect/Timing 1+1 protection
management
• Supports Equipment Protection management for E1,
E3/DS3, and STM-1 Electrical cards
• Supports MS-SPRing protection management
• Supports MSP protection management
• Supports SNCP/I protection management
• Supports Ethernet RSTP protection management

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 25
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Feature Description
Performance Management • Supports monitored performance TPs/ports and
parameters selection.
• Supports current performance management
• Supports historical performance management
Maintenance • Loopback Configuration for testing
• LED test
• PRBS Test Maintenance
• AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management
Fault Management • Collects, displays, and manages SURPASS hiT 7060
fault messages (including NE, card, port and TP
related)
• Supports color coded alarms to indicate alarm
severity level
• Supports active alarm synchronization
Event Management • Supports NE related event management
Tab. 3.1 Feature List

26 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

4 Hardware Configuration
The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software can run on the following Operation System:
• Microsoft Windows based operation system on a desktop or laptop PC.

The minimum hardware requirements of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT are listed in Tab.
4.1.

Configuration Hardware Requirement


Windows-Based Computer • 1.6 GHz Pentium-4 Processor
• 512M RAM
• 1 × 20GB Hard Disk
• TP Ethernet 10/100BASE-T Networking Port
• Graphic Card with 1024 × 768 resolution (75Hz
refresh for Desktop; 60-Hz refresh for
Notebook)
• Color Monitor (17’’ for Desktop; 14’’ TFT for
Notebook)
Tab. 4.1 Minimum Hardware Requirement of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 27
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

5 Software Configuration
The following operation system and software package are required to install and run the
TNMS-M SUPASS hiT 7060 LCT.
• Microsoft Windows based operation system
− Windows 2000 Professional operation system, or

− Windows XP Professional operation system

• The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software

28 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

6 Installation

6.1 Route Configuration


The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT manages NEs based on TCP/IP addresses.
Therefore, the user must set a static route to enable the LCT system to find the NE. Before
setting the route, ensure that the console port and the MGMT port of the user’s computer are
connected with the peer ports of SURPASS hiT 7060.

i The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT only supports NE management though the MGMT
port.

1. Click <Start>Æ<Programs>Æ<Accessories>Æ<Communications>Æ<Hyper Terminal>


to open the <New Connection: Hyper Terminal> window. (See Fig. 6.1)

Fig. 6.1 Open Hyper Terminal

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 29
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

2. In the <Connection Description> window, enter the user name in the <Name> field and
click <OK>.

Fig. 6.2 Hyper Terminal--Connection Description

3. In the <Connect To> window, choose <COM1> (or the computer’s connected console
port) in the <Connect using> drop-down menu and click <OK>.

Fig. 6.3 Hyper Terminal--Connect To

30 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

4. In the <COM1 Properties> window, click <Restore Defaults> and click <OK>.

Fig. 6.4 Hyper Terminal--COM1 Properties

5. Press the <Enter> key several times, and the CLI interface window will appear. (See Fig.
6.5) Input the user name and the password, and then press <Enter>. The user name is
<root> and the password is left blank.

Fig. 6.5 CLI Window--Welcome to Login

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 31
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

6. The Main Menu will appear. (See Fig. 6.6)

Fig. 6.6 Main Menu

7. User Table
Press <U> from the Main Menu and the User Table will appear. (See Fig. 6.7). The User
Table enables the user to add/delete/modify the user information.

Fig. 6.7 User Table

32 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

8. Press <E> from the User Table to edit a given user.

Fig. 6.8 Edit a Given User

9. IP Address Configuration
Press <I> from the Main Menu to configure the node IP address, the management port IP
address, the management port subnet mask, and the default gateway for the management
port.
The user can select options 1 to 4 to configure the special IP addresses based on his/her
needs.

Fig. 6.9 IP Address Configuration

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 33
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

10. Click <Start>Æ<Programs>Æ<Accessories>Æ<Command Prompt> to open the


<Command Prompt> window, and then use the <route add [destination] [mask netmask]
[gateway] [-p]> command to enter the static route information. For example, enter the
command <route add 192.168.16.243 mask 255.255.255.255 192.168.12.243 –p> to add the
static route information into the user’s computer. This means the added route’s IP address is
192.168.16.243, the mask is 255.255.255.255, and the gateway is 192.168.12.243. (See Fig.
6.10)
Note: The user can use the <route /help> command to get more information about the
i <route> command.

Fig. 6.10 Add Static Route Information

6.2 Installing the LCT software package


After selecting the SURPASS hiT series products, Siemens post sales engineers and
technical support technicians will help to complete selection and installation of the hardware
and software based on requirements. A TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT installation CD
will be provided. Install the LCT software package from the provided CD using the program’s
wizard mode on any qualified operation system.

i Note: Installing the LCT software package on a pure German operation system`s pc can not
be supported. In the installing process, it will check whether the pc`s operation system is
english and popup inform message.
LCT`s upgrade procedure do not allow overlap installation.

An example of how to install the LCT software package is given below.

34 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1. Double-click the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT setup file (for example:
TNMS_M_SURPASS_hiT7060_R32_setup.exe). A welcome screen will appear. (See Fig.
6.11) Then click <Next>.

Fig. 6.11 Setup Wizard Welcome Screen

2. In the <License Agreement> window, choose <I accept the agreement>, and click
<Next> to continue.

Fig. 6.12 License Agreement

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 35
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

3. Accept the default destination location, and click <Next> to continue. (See Fig. 6.13)
Note: The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software will be installed by default in the
i %SystemDrive%\Siemens\hiT 7060_R34 folder. (%SystemDrive% specifies the drive letter
of the hard disk drive containing the Windows operating system.) For example: If Windows is
installed in Drive C, the software will be installed in the C:\Siemens\hiT 7060_R34 folder.

Fig. 6.13 Select Destination Location

4. Accept the default Start Menu folder location, and click <Next> to continue.

Fig. 6.14 Select Start Menu Folder

If user change the default folder path, don’t input 2 continuous SPACEs in install
dictionary/folder name, otherwise some function of system will run abnormally.

36 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

5. In the <Select Additional Tasks> window, there are two options: 1) <Create a desktop
icon> and 2) <Create a Quick Launch icon>. The default option is for the 1st option to be
selected. Click <Next> after selecting the preferred choice.

Fig. 6.15 Select Additional Tasks

6. After reviewing installation choices, click <Install> to proceed or <Back> to go back and
make changes.

Fig. 6.16 Ready to Install

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 37
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

7. Next the software is installed. (See Fig. 6.17)

Fig. 6.17 Installing

8. If at any of the 7 steps above you wish to stop the installation process, click <Cancel>,
and the <Exit Setup> window will appear. (See Fig. 6.18) Click <Yes> to exit setup. Click
<No> to continue the installation process.

Fig. 6.18 Exit Setup

38 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

9. Click <Finish> to finish the installation. It is recommended that do not select the option
<Launch TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT>.

Fig. 6.19 Completing the Setup

6.3 Uninstalling the LCT Software Package


1. Click <Start>, select <Programs>, select <TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT >, and
click <Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT>.

Fig. 6.20 Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

2. Select <Yes> to uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT. (See Fig. 6.21)

Fig. 6.21 Confirm Window for Uninstall

3. If <Yes> is selected, an Uninstall Status window will appear. (Fig. 6.22)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 39
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 6.22 Uninstall Status

4. After the uninstalling is complete, a confirm window box will appear. Click <OK> to finish
the uninstall process. Some items could not be removed automatically, but can be removed
manually from the installation folder (%SystemDrive%\Siemens by default).

Fig. 6.23 Completing Uninstalling Process

40 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

7 Starting and Shutting down TNMS-M SURPASS


hiT 7060 LCT

7.1 Starting TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT


After the SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software is installed, there are two ways to start TNMS-M
SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:
Option 1:
If the <Create a desktop icon> option is selected during the installation process, a <TNMS-M
SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT> icon will appear on Desktop. (See Fig. 7.1) Double-click the
icon to start the LCT program.

Fig. 7.1 Desktop Icon

Option 2:
1. Select <Start>Æ<Programs>Æ<TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT>, and click the
<TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT> icon to start the LCT program. (See Fig. 7.2)

Fig. 7.2 Start LCT from Start Menu

Option 3:
<TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT> can also be started from quick lunch icon. (See Fig.
7.3) Double-click the icon to start the LCT program.

Fig. 7.3 Start LCT from quick lunch icon

Then the LCT login window will start. (See Fig. 7.4) Input LCT’s Login Name, Password,
NE’s Node IP Address which can be communicated with and LCT IP Adress. Then click
<Connect>.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 41
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 7.4 LCT Login Window

For example, the user can login TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT using account:
Login Name: root
Password: public
The password can be changed in the LCT program.

Note:
i
I. If the Network adapter of the computer has more than one IP addresses, the user can
choose LCT Trap IP address from the drop-down menu. (See Fig. 7.4)
II. If there are multiple IP address configured on the PC, the IP address used as LCT Trap
IP should be different from the one used as TNMS-M server IP. If the same IP address is
used and TNMS-M has run already, the LCT program can't be started scuccessfully.
III. The NE will disconnect from the LCT program when the NE is restarted. The LCT
program will re-connect to the NE automatically after the NE is restarted. To connect
manually, the user needs to wait at least 40s after the NE is restarted.
IV. The NE can’t be managed by the TNMS server and the LCT program on the same host
at the same time.
V. There is no READ/WRITE access control policy implemented between TNMS-M and the
LCT program.
VI. The date and time of the user’s PC cannot be changed when LCT is running.

42 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

2. After successfully connecting to the NE, the following GUI will appear. (See Fig. 7.5)

Fig. 7.5 LCT GUI

7.2 Shutting Down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT


There are two ways to shut down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:
Option 1: Click the <X> at top right of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT window.
Option 2: From the main menu, click <System>Æ<Exit>.
A confirm window will appear. Click <Yes> to confirm the shutdown request.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 43
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

8 Main Interface Features

8.1 Main Window


The main window (See Fig. 8.1) consists of the following elements:
• Title Bar
• Main Menu Bar
• Work Area

Title Bar

Main Menu Bar

Work Area

Fig. 8.1 Main Window

8.1.1 Title Bar


The title bar is located at the top of the main window (See Fig. 8.1)
The title bar contains:
Leftmost, a special window symbol.
The type designation of the network element.

8.1.2 Main Menu Bar


The main menu bar is located at the top of the main window, below the title bar (See Fig.
8.1). It contains the main menu.

44 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

The drop-down menu items will be changed when different object (for example: an NE, a
i card, or a port) is selected in chassis view.

Before the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to the NE, the main menu bar
only shows three drop-down menus: <System>, <Security>, and <Help>.

System Working with the software


Connect Allow the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to connect with NE
Audio Alarm Config Manage all audio alarm, including melody type and play times
Exit Close the main window of the NE application software, thus ending the
session

Security Working with the software


Account Management Manage user accounts
Change Password Change current password of LCT
Lock Screen Lock the screen
Lock Screen Config Set lock screen information

Help Working with the software


Help Launch the Online Help
About Show the information about TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

After the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to the NE, the main menu bar
i shows ten drop-down menus: <System>, <Configuration>, <DCN> ,<RPR>, <Fault>,
<Performance>, <Maintenance>, <Windows>, <Security>, and <Help>.

System Working with the software


Disconnect Disconnect LCT from NE
Audio Alarm Config Manage all audio alarm, including melody type and play times
Exit Close the main window of the NE application software, thus ending the
session

Configuration Showing system options


NE Manage NE
Main Shelf Property View and modify the NE properties
Configuration
Synchronize Main Synchronize NE and TNMS-M databases
Shelf
Warm Reboot Main Restart the NE under the TNMS-M system (software reboot)
Shelf
Cold Reboot Main Restart the NE and will cause traffic loss (hardware reboot)
Shelf
Shutdown Main Shelf Safely close the NE
TP Configuration View and modify all TP Properties
TP Multiplexing Structure View and modify the TP construction
Cross-Connection Manage all cross- connections in the NE
Management
Synchronization Set and manage the timing references
Management
CC(Card) 1+ 1 Protection Manage CC 1+1 Protection
1+1 Equipment Protection Create and manage 1+1equipment protection

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 45
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Management
1:N Equipment Protection Create and manage 1:N equipment protection
Management
MSP Management Create and manage MS Protection
MS-SPRing Management Create and manage MS-SPRing
SNCP Management Create and manage SNCP
NE FTP Configuration Set server address
NE MIB management Manage the NE MIB database
NE Software Management Update, back up, and switch NE software
NE Time Setting View and change NE time setting
NE Trap Destination Show and manage all IP addresses of PCs on which TNMS-M are running.
Configure Currently managed NEs will send trap to all those TNMS-M
Alarm Out Configuration Set system out alarm on or off
EOW Configuration Manage the EOW data
MDI/MDO Configuration Set the MDI/MDO alarm reporting options
NE Resource Usage View the cards and ports in Mainboard and their usages. Data cards are not
Statistics listed.

DCN Manage DCN setting


Change NE IP Change NE’s IP
Change Ethernet IP Change NE’s Ethernet IP
DCC Management Manage DCC Status
GRE Tunnel Configure GRE Tunnel
MGMT Port RIP Enable or disable RIP
Configuration
IP Route Configuration Configure IP Route
OSI Configuration Configure OSI
OSPF Manage OSPF

RPR Configuring RPR functions


RPR Service Configure RPR Service
Configuration
RPR Service Manage RPR Service
Management

Fault Managing Alarm


Active Alarms Display current alarms occur on NE/Card/Port according to managed object
selected currently
History Alarms Display history alarms occur on NE/Card/Port
Events Display all events about the operation
Note: Only when neither a card nor a port in chassis is highlighted, would this
menu item be displayed
AIS/RDI Alarm Inhibit special TP’s AIS/RDI Alarm
Configuration
Alarm Inhibit Inhibit specific NE/special card or port’s alarm
Configuration
Alarm Type List Manage alarm type
Management

Performance Viewing the status of NE

46 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Current SDH View and manage current SDH performance


Performance
History SDH View and manage history SDH performance
Performance
SDH UnAvailable Set SDH Unavailable Periods
Periods
Current Ethernet View and manage current Ethernet performance
Performance
History Ethernet View and manage history Ethernet performance
Performance
Ethernet Performance Set Ethernet performance thresholds
Thresholds
Current Ethernet VLAN View and manage current Ethernet VLAN performance
Statistics
History Ethernet VLAN View and manage history Ethernet VLAN performance
Statistic
5 Second Ethernet View and manage 5 Second Ethernet performance
Performance
5 Second Ethernet VLAN View and manage current 5 Second Ethernet VLAN performance
Performance
5 Second Ethernet VLAN View and manage history 5 Second Ethernet VLAN performance
History Performance
Current E1 Bit Slip View and manage current E1 Bit Slip performance
Performance
History E1 Bit Slip View and manage history E1 Bit Slip performance
Performance
Current PDH CRC View and manage current PDH CRC performance
Performance
History PDH CRC View and manage history PDH CRC performance
Performance
PDH CRC UnAvailable Set PDH CRC Unavailable Periods
Periods
Current RPR Span View and manage current RPR Span performance
Performance
History RPR Span View and manage historyRPR Span performance
Performance
Current RPR MAC Client View and manage current RPR MAC Client performance
Performance
History RPR MAC Client View and manage history RPR MAC Client performance
Performance

Maintenance Working with the maintenance test


AIS/RDI Insertion Test Perform and manage AIS/RDI insertion test
Management
Loopback Test Perform and manage Loop-back test
Management
PRBS Test Management Perform and manage PRBS test
LED Test Perform LED test

Windows Selecting the view for the open windows


SURPASS hiT 7060 List of all the currently-open windows; the selected window (in the foreground)
Chassis View is indicated by the tick
Minimize All Minimize all opened windows

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 47
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Maximize All Maximize all windows

Security Working with the software


Account Management Manage user accounts
Change Password Change current password of LCT
Lock Screen Lock screen
Lock Screen Config Set information about lock screen

Help Working with the software


Help Launch the Online Help
About Show the information about TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT
Tab. 8.1 Main Menu Structure

8.1.3 Work Area


This range of the main window (See Fig. 8.1) shows all the windows which have just been
opened.
All windows within the work area can be opened or closed without the application software
ending (function of Windows).
In the Alarm Count area, all current alarms are collected and the numbers are listed by
severity and category.

8.2 Submenus (with Right Mouse Button Click)


The menu sequence which is described here depends on the selected card.

8.2.1 SDH Card


After selecting the STM card, click right button.

Card Property Open Card Properties window


Configuration
Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms
Cold Reboot Card Restart card
Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.2 SDH Card Submenu Structure

8.2.2 CC Card
After selecting the CC card, click right button.

CC<CC(H25L10)>
Card Property Configuration Open Card Properties window
Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
CC(Card) 1+1 Protection Manage CC 1+1 Protection
Cross-Connect Management Open Cross Connection Management window
Synchronization Management Open Synchronization Management window
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms

48 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Cold Reboot Card Restart card


Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.3 CC Card Submenu Structure

8.2.3 SC Card
After selecting the SC card, click right button.

Card Property Open Card Properties window


Configuration
Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms
Warm Reboot Card Restart card under the TNMS-M system (software reboot)
Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot)
Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.4 SC Card Submenu Structure

Note:
- Warm rebooting SC card will cause the NE offline.
- Cold rebooting card will cause the traffic loss and cold rebooting SC card will cause the NE
offline.
- When there is FPGA upgrade in SC card only, the user should only reboot the SC card,
rather than reboot the whole system. Otherwise the whole system’s traffic will be interrupted.

8.2.4 Ethernet Card


After selecting the Ethernet card, click right button, the maximum main menu will be show as
the table below.

The ethernet menu structure will be different if user select a ethernet/L2 card or select a
ethernet/T card.

For a ethernet/T card:


Card Property Open Card Properties window
Configuration
Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
LAN Ports Property View and modify the properties of LAN Port
Configuration
WAN Ports Property View and modify the properties of WAN Port
Configuration
WAN Ports TP Structure View and modify TP Structure of WAN Port
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms
Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot)
Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.5 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- ethernet/Tcard

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 49
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

For a ethernet/L2 card:


Card Property Open Card Properties window
Configuration
Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
ACL Configuration View and modify the Access Control List of a Ethernet card
Bridge Configuration Configure bridge properties
VLAN Management Configure VLAN configurations
LAN Ports Property View and modify the properties of LAN Port
Configuration
WAN Ports Property View and modify the properties of WAN Port
Configuration
WAN Ports TP Structure View and modify TP Structure of WAN Port
IGMP Snooping Snoop IGMP
RSTP Configuration View and modify the RSTP properties of a Ethernet card
Static MAC Address Configure Static MAC Address of a Ethernet card
Configuration
Static Multicast View and modify the Static Multicast of a Ethernet card
Configuration
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms
Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot)
Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.6 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- ethernet/L2 card

8.2.5 RPR Card


After selecting the RPR card, click right button.

Card Property Configuration Open Card Properties window


Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window
RPR Client Ports Property Configure RPR Client Ports Property
Configuration
RPR WAN Ports Property Configure RPR WAN Ports Property
Configuration
Static Multicast Configuration Configure RPR Group Multicast
RPR Station Configuration Configure RPR station
RPR Topology Information View the properties of RPR
Active Alarms View and manage active alarms
History Alarms View and manage history alarms
Cold Reboot Card Restart Card
Delete Card Delete the card
Tab. 8.7 RPR Card Submenu Structure

50 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

9 Security and User Management


The <Security> menu provides an entrance to manage the security of the system. (See Fig.
9.1)

Fig. 9.1 Security Menu

9.1 Account Management


User Account Management helps to control the security of the system. Correct setup can get
rid of many unexpected system errors and keep the systems running safely.
To open User Account Management:
Select <Security>Æ<Account Management> from the main menu. The <User Account
Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 9.2)

Fig. 9.2 Account Management

9.1.1 User
To add a user account, select <File>Æ<Add User>.
The <Create New User> window will pop up. (See Fig. 9.3)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 51
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.3 Create New User

Fill in the <User Login Name>, <User Password> and <Repeat Password> blanks for a new
user. Select groups that this new user belongs to.

Check the expiry time. Then click <Create User> to add this user. The new user name will
appear beneath the Account tree. Click <Cancel> to withdraw all operations.

Here, the user named <core_administrator> is created. In the left panel, select the
corresponding user. The properties of this user will appear in the right panel (See Fig. 9.4)

Select corresponding tab to view and modify <Member of Groups for core_administrator>,
<User Profile for core_administrator >, <Permitted Operations for core_administrator > and
<Operation Logs for core_administrator >.

52 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.4 New User Added View

In the <Member of Groups for core_administrator> tab: All the groups that this user belongs
to are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.4) Here, user core_administrator belongs to the group:
Administration.

Click <Setting Groups> to add or remove this user from a group. (See Fig. 9.5)

Fig. 9.5 Select Groups

Select the group in the left and click “>>” to add the user to this group. Select the group in
the right and click “<<” to remove a user from this group.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 53
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <User Profile for core_administrator> tab: The status, user account and password
expiry of this user are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.6)

Fig. 9.6 User Profile

Click <Modify User Profile> to set the user profile. (See Fig. 9.7)

Fig. 9.7 Setting User Profile

54 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Configure the user’s status, Account expiry, and Password expiry. Click <OK> to confirm the
modification or <Cancel> to quit.

In the <Permitted Operations for core_administrator> tab: All the operations permitted to this
user are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.8)

Fig. 9.8 Permitted Operations for User

Note: The permitted operations for user cannot be changed in this window. To change the
i permitted operations for a user, the operator should configure the permitted operations for
group which the user belongs to. (Refer to Chapter 9.1.2)

In the <Operation Logs for core_administrator> tab: All of the operations a specific user has
done are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.9)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 55
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.9 Operation Logs for User

Click <Clear Operation Logs> to clear the whole operation history.

To change a user’s password:


Select the corresponding user in the left panel.
Right click and select < Reset Password>. Input the new password in the pop up window.
(See Fig. 9.10)

Fig. 9.10 Reset Passwords

Click <Reset Password> to confirm the change, and <Cancel> to quit without change.

9.1.2 Group
To add a group, select <File>Æ<Add Group>.
The <Create New Group> window will pop up. (See Fig. 9.11)

56 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.11 Create New Group

Input new group name in the <Enter Group Name> field. Select the operations the group is
allowed to perform. Click <Create Group> to finalize this new group. The new group name
will appear beneath the Accounts tree. Click <Cancel> to withdraw this operation. Here a
group named DemoGroup has been added. In the left panel, select the corresponding group.
The properties of this group will appear in the right panel. (See Fig. 9.12)

Fig. 9.12 New Group Added View

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 57
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <Group Member for DemoGroup> tab: All the users that belong to this group will be
listed in this tab. In the <DemoGroup> Group, there are no users. Click <Setting Members>
to add or delete user in this group. (See Fig. 9.13)

Fig. 9.13 Select Users

Select the user in the left and click “>>” to add a user to this group. Select the user in the
right and click “<<” to remove a user from this group.

In the <Operations for DemoGroup> tab: All the permitted operations are listed in this tab.
(See Fig. 9.14)

58 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.14 Permitted operations for Group

Click <Setting Group Operation> to set the permitted operations for this group. (See Fig.
9.15)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 59
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.15 Assign Group Permissions

Check the checkbox to the left of the operations to select or deselect a specific operation, or
check the checkbox to the left of the group to select or deselect all the operations beneath it.

Click to expand all the branches, or to collapse all the branches.

Click <OK> to confirm and finish all the modifications. Click <Cancel> to quit this modification
without any changes.

Note: It is not recommended to clear the Security operation permission for users in the
i Administration group. If done, the user can only clear the corresponding information in the
database and can never operate the Security Management configuration.

To delete a group:
Select the corresponding group without users in the left panel.
Right click and select <Remove Group>.
Confirm in the warning window to delete this user.

9.1.3 View
Select <view>Æ<Refresh> to update data about users and group.

60 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

9.2 Change Password


From the main menu, select <Security>→<Change Password> to change password for the
current user. The <Change Password> window will appear (See Fig. 9.16). Input the old
password and the new one in the blanks. Click <OK> to confirm or click <Cancel> to quit the
window.

Fig. 9.16 Change Password

9.3 Lock Screen


In order to prevent unauthorized people from operating the system, the SURPASS hiT 7060
LCT will automatically lock after being idle for several minutes. Alternatively, the operator
can choose <Security>→<Lock Screen> from the main toolbar to lock the screen manually.
Only by inputting the user’s password in <Lock Screen> dialog can the operator re-open the
LCT system. (See Fig. 9.17)

Fig. 9.17 Lock Screen

Select <Security>→<Lock Screen Config> to configure the properties of lock screen. (See
Fig. 9.18)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 61
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 9.18 LockScreen Config

Check the box to enable or disable the lock screen feature.


Enter the waiting time of lock screen.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Cancel> to quit this dialog. All unsaved modifications will be lost.

62 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

10 NE Configuration and Management


Before performing actions on the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT, the LCT must be
connected to an NE.

10.1 Chassis View


When the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to an NE, the NE Chassis View
will appear, which shows the real-time status of the NE. (See Fig. 10.1)

Fig. 10.1 Chassis View

For example, when the second card from the right side in Fig. 10.1 is plugged in, the green
<Active> warning will be marked on the card. If the card is pulled out, the red <Absent>
warning will be marked on the card.

In this view, a total representation of the current node status will appear, including a
graphical view of all the slots, the card functions, the card types, the status of individual ports,
the power status, and other NE functions. The user can modify node properties in the
configuration windows. The configuration windows can be opened from the main menu bar
or the right-click menu of the chassis view.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 63
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Right-click the chassis view and select <Refresh Chassis> in the pop-up menu (See Fig.
10.2) or select <Configuration>→<Refresh Chassis> to refresh the chassis view.

Fig. 10.2 Refresh Chassis

i Note: The system running without CC is forbidden. All cards will be fault and all service will
be interrupted. In order to restore system and service, please re-install CC module first, then
cold-reboot the system. The cold-reboot will take about 3 minutes. After reboot, all the
configuration and service will be restored.

10.2 Synchronizing NE
In order to synchronize the LCT database with the NE’s database, the user must
synchronize the NE using the following steps listed below.
Right-click the chassis view and select <Synchronize Main Shelf > (See Fig. 10.2).Or select
<Configuration>Æ<NE>Æ<synchronize Main Shelf > in main menu. The <NE
Synchronization> window will appear (See Fig. 10.3)

64 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 10.3 Synchronize NE

Select the content to synchronize, and click <OK> to start the synchronization process. If the
synchronization process succeeds, a message box will appear.
Click <Cancel> to quit the current window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

10.3 NE Property Configuration


To open the <NE Properties> window, two methods can be used:
• In the chassis view, right-click and select <NE Property Configuration>.
• From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE>Æ< Main Shelf Property
Configuration>.
An <NE Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.4)

Fig. 10.4 NE Properties

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 65
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Each item in the window is described in the following table. (See Tab. 10.1)

Item Description
NE Label This is used to distinguish different nodes
IP Address The IP address of this node
Location The physical position of this node in real-life
Subnet Mask The subnet mask of this node
Description The user uses this to field to input his/her own detailed description
of this node
Gateway The gateway of this node
Contact The contact or owner of this node
Serial Number The serial number of this node configured by the manufacturer
Version The hardware version of this node.
System Mode The current system mode of this node (which one cannot be
modified from this window).
Date/Time The current time on this node
Card List The simple information of all the cards on this node. The user can
access the card configuration window by double-clicking the
corresponding line in the table.
Tab. 10.1 NE Properties

The user can change properties of an NE, but modifications are completed only after the
i <Apply> button has been clicked.

Click <Refresh> to refresh the information of the window.


Click <OK> to confirm all the modifications and to close the window.
If some of the properties are changed, click the <Refresh> button to check the latest status
of this node.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Click <Print> to print the information of this node.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

10.4 Warm Reboot NE


To Warm Reboot NE, select <Configuration>Æ<NE>Æ<Warm Reboot Main Shelf > from the
main menu. (See Fig. 10.5)

Fig. 10.5 Warm Reboot NE

Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning window to confirm the command, or click <No> to
cancel this operation.

66 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

10.5 Cold Reboot NE


To Cold Reboot NE:
Select <Configuration>→<NE>→<Cold Reboot Main Shelf > or <Configuration>→<Warm
Reboot NE> from the main menu .(See Fig. 10.6)

Fig. 10.6 Cold Reboot NE

Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning window to confirm the command, or click <No> to
cancel this operation.

10.6 Shutting down NE


To shut down NE, select <Configuration>Æ<NE>Æ<Shutdown Main Shelf > from the main
menu. (See Fig. 10.7)

Fig. 10.7 Shutdown NE

Fig. 10.8 Shutdown Information

Click <Yes> to confirm shutting down this NE. (See Fig. 10.8) The NE that has been shut
down will be offline.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 67
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

10.7 FTP Settings


The FTP Settings can get the latest software and data support from the FTP server. To
perform NE software management, MIB management, the user needs to configure first the
TNMS-M FTP setting as well as the FTP server.
Use the following steps to apply FTP Settings:
From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE FTP Configuration>. The <FTP settings>
window will appear with the current FTP settings. (See Fig. 10.9)

Fig. 10.9 FTP Settings

To modify the current configuration in the <FTP Server Settings> section:


Input the FTP server’s IP address in the <FTP Server IP Address> field.
Input the FTP username in the <UserName> field.
Input the FTP user password in the <Password> field.
Note: Both of username and password are <pm> by default.

All the latest software and data of FTP server are stored in the <%Install_Drive%\ftproot>
folder (%Install_Drive% specifies the drive letter of the hard disk drive containing the LCT
program). For example, if the LCT program is installed in Drive C, the FTP root will be the
<C:\ftproot> folder. (See Fig. 10.10)

Fig. 10.10 FTP Root

The data of the user <pm> will be stored in the corresponding folders under the
<%Install_Drive%\ftproot\pm> folder. For example, the MIB files uploaded from the LCT
program will be stored in the <%Install_Drive%\ftproot\pm\MibUpload> folder.

68 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Refresh> to update the current configuration.


Click <Apply> to confirm the modification.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: The configuration of the FTP server should be the same as the real FTP server
i settings. Generally, the LCT server and the FTP server are on the same physical machine.
The case that LCT server and FTP server are on different machine is also supported.

10.8 NE Software Management

Two software images can be stored in the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060, an active image
and a backup image. Using the LCT, the user can download a TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060
NE software image to the NE as the backup version from the FTP server or the user may
switch software images between active and backup versions.

NE software management is done by the steps below:


From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE Software Management>. The <NE
Software Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.11)

Fig. 10.11 NE Software Management

Each field in the window is described as follows. (See Tab. 10.2)

Fields Description
Active Software Version The NE software version currently running
Backup Software Version The backup NE software version
State of Last Command The last command status
Tab. 10.2 NE Software Management Window Field Description

Click <FTP Setting> to open the <FTP setting> window. (See Fig. 10.12)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 69
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 10.12 FTP Setting

Input the corresponding information in the <FTP Server IP Address>, <UserName>, and
<Password> fields.
Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

In the <NE Software Management> window, input the NE software file name on the FTP
server in the <Software file name> field, and click <Download from…> to download the
software image to the NE as the backup software version from the FTP server.
Click <Switch> to switch the software images between the active version and the backup
version. After Switch process finished the <Result window> will pop-up to prompt users to
cold reboot or warm reboot the NE. (See Fig. 10.13)

Fig. 10.13 NE Software Switch Result Windows

NOTE:
i 1) System cold reboot (system initialization) takes 3 minutes to complete. It is suggested
that no other operations (such as card insertion or pull-out, system power-on or power-
off) be performed during the system initialization.
2) System cold reboot will cause traffic hit. The traffic hit time is about 30 second, maximum
3 minutes.
3) System warm reboot process takes 2 minutes. It is suggested that no operations (such
as card insertion or pull out, system power on or power off) be performed during system
reboot.
4) Card reset will impact the traffic passing through this card. The traffic hit time is about 30
seconds (maximum 60 seconds).

Click <Cancel> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

70 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Note: Make sure that the FTP server settings and the software image path are correctly
i configured before the operation is launched.

10.9 MIB Management


The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT MIB consists of the internal databases/files in the NE
that store all the NE configuration and runtime status information. There are two versions of
MIB files stored in the NE: one is the active version and another is a backup version, all the
MIB management functions can be performed by using the LCT.
Following the steps below to perform MIB management:
From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE MIB Management>. The <MIB
Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.14)

Fig. 10.14 MIB Management <Upload> tab

Fig. 10.15 MIB Management <Download> tab

In the <MIB Management> window, to upload the MIB files from the NE to the FTP server,
input the directory in which the MIB files will be saved on the FTP server in the <Upload To
File> field in the <Upload> tab, and then click <Upload From NE>. (See Fig. 10.14)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 71
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

To download the MIB files from the FTP server to the NE, input the directory in which the
MIB files exist in the <Download From File > field in the <Download> tab, and then click
<Download To NE>. (See Fig. 10.15)
To activate the backup MIB version, click <Switch NE MIB> in the <Download> tab. This
operation will activate the backup MIB version.
To clear the MIB, click <Clear NE MIB> in the <Upload> tab. All the NE data will be restored
to the factory default. In case of data lost, please upload MIB before clearing the MIB.
i 1. The download process can be canceled at anytime.
2. The operator can manually download the MIB database into the same type of NE.
3. When MIB switch is executed, the network management system reminds user to “Warm
reboot” or “Cold Reboot” the system based on the system operation manual. The user
should reboot the system immediately. Before system reboot (after the MIB is switched), any
NE operation will not be saved into MIB; therefore, any operation before system reboot is
invalid.

The <Status> field shows the state of the operation.

10.10 NE Time Setting


Open the corresponding chassis view.
From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE Time Setting>.
An NE Time Settings window will appear. (See Fig. 10.16)

Fig. 10.16 NE Time Settings

In the drop-down menu of <Network Time Protocol>, the protocol can be set <Enabled> or
<Disabled>.
Under <NE list (Active)>, select the corresponding NE whose time will be modified.

72 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the drop-down menu of <Network Element Time>, the current time can be viewed
manually.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information on setting time.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit the window, all the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

10.11 NE Trap Destination Configuration


Select <Configuration> Æ <NE Trap Destination Configure>. An NE Destination
Configuration window will appear. (See Fig. 10.17)

Fig. 10.17 NE Destination

The function of each button is described as follows:


Click <Apply> to set a selection in the window.
Click <Delete>, a confirm window will appear. (See Fig. 10.18)
Click <Refresh> to update current NE Destination.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Fig. 10.18 Confirmation for Delete

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 73
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11 SDH Configuration and Management

11.1 Card Configuration and Management


In the chassis view, the card selected becomes framed in blue.
There are two methods to open the card configuration window in chassis view:
• Right-click the card, select <Card Property Configuration>, or
• Select the card, and select <Configuration>Æ<Card Property Configuration> from the
main menu.
A Card Properties window will appear. (See Fig. 11.1)

11.1.1 SDH Card Configuration and Management


A typical window for card properties is shown below:

Fig. 11.1 Card Properties

Each field in the window is described as follows. (See Tab. 11.1)

Fields Description
Slot Number The slot this card has been plugged into.
Card Function The function of the card. The function of the card will also
be showed in the chassis view, on the right top corner of
this card, and in a floating window box after the mouse
has been pointing on the card for a while.

74 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fields Description
Card Type The type of the card, such as, STM-64, STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1, UDC, GE, FE, MC, SC, CC, etc.
Card State The current state of this card
Card Serial Number The serial number of this card
Card Label This is used to distinguish different cards easily
Boot Image Version The version of the boot server

Boot Image Date The time, when the boot server started
Hardware Version The version of this card.

Temperature Threshold The threshold setting for the temperature alarm. When the
temperature of this card is over the threshold, an alarm
will be raised.
Temperature Clear When the temperature has fallen below the temperature
Threshold clear threshold, the temperature alarm will be
automatically cleared.
S Code The S code of this card
Working Mode The working mode of this card. (For 4×STM1/4 card only)
Port list The list of all ports on this card.
Tab. 11.1 Card Identification

Note: For 4×STM1/4 card, when it is inserted to slot 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, its working mode can be
switched between 4xSTM4 and 4xSTM1, if there is any cc or protection or timing sources on
the card, its working mode can’t be switched.

If any properties of a card have been modified, the <Apply> button must be used to validate
these changes. And only after clicking this button, will the modification be completed.
While viewing the card options and not changing properties of the card, click <Refresh> to
check the latest status of the card.
Click <Print> to print the information on this card.
Click <Close> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

11.1.2 Synchronizing the Card


Right-click the corresponding card in the chassis view and select <Synchronize Card>. Or
select the card and select <Configuration>→<Synchronize Card> from the main menu. A
synchronize card window will appear. (See Fig. 11.2)

Fig. 11.2 Synchronize Card

Click <Yes> to start the synchronization process.


Click <No> to cancel the synchronization process.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 75
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.1.3 Delete Card


When the card has an absent or mismatch status, right-click it and select <Delete Card> in
the pop-up menu. Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning window to confirm the deletion
command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

11.1.4 Cold Reboot Card


Right-click a card and select <Cold Reboot Card> in the pop-up menu, or highlight a card
and select <Configuration>→<Cold Reboot Card>. Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning
window to confirm the command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

11.2 SDH Port Configuration and Management


There are three ways to open the <SDH Port Configuration> window:
• In the Chassis View, choose the corresponding port. Right-click, and select <SDH Port
Property Configuration>.
• Choose the corresponding port, and select <Configuration>→<SDH Port Property
Configuration> from the main menu.
• Open the port configuration in the <Card Properties> window, and double-click the line of
the port to view or configure in the <Port List>.
The <SDH Port Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.3)

Fig. 11.3 SDH Port Properties

There are two parts in this window: <Port Configuration> and <Port Status>. Each parameter
in this window is described below. Generally, users can only change some parameters in the
Port Configuration part.

76 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.2.1 Port Configuration

Fields Descriptions
Port Type This identifies the type of port
Port Label A user can change this field to distinguish among ports
Port Mode There are three modes:
<Auto mode>: The system decides the optimum mode for this
port.
<Monitor mode>: When an alarm is generated from this card,
it will be automatically reported to the alarm management.
<Non-monitor mode>: No matter how many alarms are
generated from this card, none of them will be reported.
Port Admin Mode There are two Port Admin Modes:
<Enable> (connected), or <Disable> (unconnected)
Auto Laser Shutdown <Yes> means the laser transmitter will shutdown
automatically when the laser receiver detects loss of signal.
Port ALS Mode There are three ALS modes to be chosen: No Command,
Manual Restart, Manual Test
Tab. 11.2 Port Configuration

11.2.2 Port Status


This section displays the SDH port current status.
While the Optical port type is SFP ---STM-1/4/16, FE, GE, the following table shows the
parameters of this port:
Fields Descriptions Range Unit
Operating Status The port status
whether it is under
operation or not.
Laser Bias Current Value of the laser 0~131 mA
bias current
Received Laser Optical power <8.1 dBm
Power received through this
port. (If the power is
low, for example
less than -40dBm,
the sensor will not
show its real number
but will show –40)
Transmitted Laser Optical power <8.1 dBm
Power transmitted out from
this port. (If the
power is low, for
example less than -
40dBm, the sensor
will not show its real
number but show -
40)
Laser Temperature Temperature of the -128~+128 ºC
laser
Tab. 11.3 Port Status

i Note:

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 77
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1. SFP optical monitor is based on SFF-8472. For SFP which can not support SFF-8472, all
the monitor items should be shown as “N/A”. (Bit 1 of address 94 or Bit 6 of address 92, data
field is A0H. If the value is 1, then the SFP supports SFF-8472 and digital diagnostic
function. )
2. When the SFP connector type is not any one of the following connectors, SC, LC, MT-RJ,
MU, Optical Pigtail. Then this SFP is regarded as electrical SFP, the four monitor item
mentioned in the above table should be all displayed as ”N/A”. (Data address is 02, data field
is A0H. LC is 07H, SC is 01H, MT-RJ is 08H, MU is 09H, optical Pigtail is 0BH )
3. The Data address 3-10 is used for SFP type auto-sensing, which the basic of
SFP_mismatch. The data address 10 is for Fiber channel. It will be also used for auto-
sensing.
For example, 100Mbytes/s (bit 0 is 1) is 1.0625Gbps, which can support STM-4/1 and FE;
200Mbytes/s (bit 2 is 1) is 2.125Gbps, which can support STM-4/1, GE and FE; 400Mbytes/s
(bit 4 is 1) is 4.25Gbps, which can support STM-16/4/1, GE and FE.

Click<Advanced> on the right part of this section to see more information about the port
status.The <Advanced Port Status Information> window will appear.(See Fig. 11.4)

Fig. 11.4 Advanced Port Status Information

There are two parts in the window :< Base Information> and <Status Details>.
The following more information of SFP port (STM-1/4/16, FE, GE) is required, and which is
provided by transceiver Vendor.

Fields Descriptions Unit Note


Compatible Specifies if it is
to SFF-8472 Compatible to
SFF-8472 or
not
Nominal Bit Data address Mbps

78 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fields Descriptions Unit Note


Rate is 03-10, data
field is A0H
Laser Data address nm 1. For normal optical SFP,
Wavelength is 60-62, data 850nm/1310nm/1550nm will be displayed.
field is A0H The formula of laser wavelength: (Byte 60, 61)
2. For Electrical SFP (FE, GE, STM-1 E),
“ Wavelength: unspecified ” is displayed.
Link Length Data address Km 1. When the link length supported for any media
supported is 14, data type is 0 which is read from SFP EEPROM, the
for 9/125um field is A0H corresponding item should be displayed as “Link
Fiber Length supported for xxxxxxxxxx: not
Link Length Data address m supported”.
supported is 16, data For example,
for field is A0H For Single mode fiber SFP, ” Link Length
50/125um supported for 9/125um Fiber: XXX Km” is
Fiber displayed. Unit is Km.
Link Length Data address m The other three transmission media types should
supported is 17, data be displayed as “unspecified”.
for field is A0H For Multi mode fiber SFP, unit is m.
62.5/125um ” Link Length supported for 50/125um Fiber:
Fiber XXX m “
Link Length Data address m “Link Length supported for 62.5/125um Fiber:
supported is 18, data XXX m” are displayed.
for copper field is A0H The other two transmission media types should
be displayed as “unspecified”.
For Electrical SFP, only” Link Length supported
for copper: XXX m” is displayed. Unit is m.
The other three transmission media types should
be displayed as “unspecified”.

SFP Vendor Data address


Name(ASCII is 20-35, data
) field is A0H
Part Number Data address
Provided by is 40-55, data
SFP Vendor field is A0H
Serial Data address
Number is 68-83, data
Provided by field is A0H
SFP Vendor
Vendor’s Data address
Manufacturin is 84-91, data
g Date field is A0H
Cooled Data address
Laser is 106-107,
Temperature data field is
A2H
TEC Current Data address
is 108-109,
data field is
A2H
Tab. 11.4 Port Status-advanced

i Note:

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 79
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1. When the data of any above item stored in SFP EEPROM is “0”, then display
“unspecified”.
2. The following table gives possible value of parameters according to different kinds of SFP.
Electrical SFP Normal SFP Normal SFP
(only A0H) (A0H and A2H)
SFF-8472 No No Yes
TX Optical Power N/A N/A √
Laser bias current N/A N/A √
RX receive Power N/A N/A √
Transceiver N/A N/A √
temperature

Nominal Bit rate √ √ √


Wavelength unspecified 850/1310/1550 850/1310/1550
Link Length unspecified √ √
supported for or unspecified or unspecified
9/125um Fiber
Link Length unspecified √ √
supported for or unspecified or unspecified
50/125um Fiber
Link Length unspecified √ √
supported for or unspecified or unspecified
62.5/125um Fiber
Link Length √ unspecified unspecified
supported for copper
Vendor Name √ √ √
Vendor Part Number √ √ √
Vendor Serial √ √ √
Number
Manufacture Date √ √ √
Tab. 11.5 value of parameters for SFP

Electrical SFP includes STM-1 electrical SFP and GE electrical SFP.


Normal SFP (only A0H) includes STM-1/4 and GE SFP, which does not support digital
diagnostic function.
Normal SFP (A0H and A2H) includes STM-1/4/16 and GE SFP, which supports digital
diagnostic function.
“√” in the table means that proper content will be displayed.

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information of the port status.


Click <Close> to close the window and rerurn to the <SDH Port Properities> window.
Click <Print> to print the information on this card.

If any properties of the port have been changed, click <Apply> to confirm them. Only after
clicking this button have the modifications been completed.
If no changes are planned as the card has been inspected, click <Refresh> to check the
latest status of the port.
Click <Print> to print the information of this port.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

80 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.3 E1 Ports Property Configuration


There are one way to open the <E1 Port Configuration> window:
Open the port configuration in the <Card Properties> window, and double-click the line of the
port to view or configure in the <Port List>.
The <E1 Ports Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.5)

Fig. 11.5 E1 Port Properties

<Port Mode>: Can be set as auto, monitored, or non-monitored.


<Port Admin Mode>: Possible values are Enabled or Disabled, which means the port is
enabled or disabled.

i Note: Only when the card has retiming function (63E1/R), will the following two parameters
appear:
<Re-timing Status>: Possible values are Enabled or Disabled, which means re-timing is
enabled or disabled.
<Expected Frame Structure>: Possible values are Unframed or Framed, when Framed is
selected, it means LOF alarm inspection is enabled; while if Unframed is selected, it means
LOF alarm inspection is disabled. Note that when Expected Frame Structure is unframed,
disable the CRC Multiframe Detector automatically and can not be changed.
<CRC Multiframe Detector>: Possible values are Deactivated or Activated, when Activated is
selected, it means LOM alarm inspection is enabled; while if Deactivated is selected, it
means LOM alarm inspection is disabled.
Click <Refresh> to check the real-time E1 port properties.
Click <Apply> to accept modifications in the window.
Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Print> to print the information of the E1 Port.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 81
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.4 CC Configuration and Management


To manage all cross-connection in the NE, open the <Cross-Connect Management> window.
There are two methods to open this window:
• Select <Configuration>Æ<Cross-Connect Management> in main window, or
• Select and right-click a cross-connect device card in the chassis view, and select
<Cross-Connect Management> in the pop-up menu.
The <Cross-Connect Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.6)

Fig. 11.6 Cross-Connect Management

Use this window to query, create, or delete cross-connection.

11.4.1 Querying Current Cross-Connection


Usually there are many Cross-Connections established within one NE. The TNMS-M
SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides a method of easily viewing them by providing a Query
function.
Input querying parameters
There are several selectable parameters to restrict the range of Cross-Connect, including
<A/Z Card> (<A/Z Port>), <Capacity>, <Circuit Label>, <Direction>, and <Type>.
Select these parameters from the drop-down menus to find the Cross-Connect of interest, i.e.
the target Cross-Connect.
After choosing a specific Source Card or Sink Card, manually choose the port to restrict the
Cross-Connect to a more limited range.
Input a specific Circuit ID to go to those Cross-Connections directly.
Click <Query> to view all Cross-Connections which satisfy the chosen conditions.
When the mouse moves to a Cross-Connection, the tool tips feature will appear.
Click <Print> to print the information.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

82 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.4.2 Adding a New Cross-Connection


Click <Create> to add a Cross-Connection; the <Create Cross-Connect> window will appear.
(See Fig. 11.7)

Fig. 11.7 Create Cross-Connect

Choose the Cards and Ports between which a Cross-Connection is to be created; all
available TPs (See Fig. 11.7) will be listed.
Choose the source and the destination TPs, and click <Apply>.
The <Apply> and <OK> buttons can only be used if two available ports have been selected.
Click <Apply> to confirm the addition without closing the window and allowing additional
cross-connections to be made.
Click <OK> to confirm the changes and close the window.
Click <Cancel> to exit the <Create Cross-Connect> window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

11.4.3 Deleting a Connection


In the <Cross-Connection Management> window, cross-connections can be selectively
deleted.
Click <Delete>, a warning window will appear.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 83
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 11.8 Confirmation for deleting Cross-Connections

Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion.


Click <No> to cancel the deletion.

11.5 TP Configuration and Management

11.5.1 Querying Current Terminal Point


Select <Configuration>Æ<TP Configuration>.
The <TP Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.9)

Fig. 11.9 TP Configuration (View 1 - As Presented)

84 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Select the <Card> and <Port> to be checked, or select All STM, Data and E1 Cards or All
STM, VSTM, and E1 Ports to check all the TPs on cards and ports.
Click <Query> to check the TPs. (See Fig. 11.10)

Fig. 11.10 TP Configuration (View 2 - Engaged)

Select and view the TP to be modified and make desired changes to TP properties. The
properties of this TP will be showed in the right panel.
Every parameter is described in the table below.

Fields Descriptions
TP Alarm Mon Can be set as Monitored or Non-Monitored
TIM Enable Can be set as Disabled or Enabled
TI Trans Mode Can be set as 16-byte, Fixed 1-byte, Provisioned 1-byte
TI Rec Mode Can be set as 16-byte, Fixed 1-byte, or provisioned 1-byte
Transmitted TI Shows the transmitted TI,cannot be changed
Received TI Shows the received TI, cannot be changed
Expected TI Shows the expected TI,cannot be changed
SL Enabled Can be set as Enabled or Disabled
Transmitted SL Shows the transmitted SL
Received SL Shows the accepted SL
Expected SL Can be set to various values.
DEG Enable Can be set as Enabled cr Disabled
DEG Threshold The value can be set as 10exp(-6) , 10exp(-7), 10exp(-8) or
10exp(-9)
EXC Enable Can be set as Enabled or Disabled.
EXC Threshold The value can be set between 10exp(-3) and 10exp(-5)
Tab. 11.6 TP Management Parameters

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 85
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

If any TP properties have been changed, the <Apply> button will be presented enabling its
use. Only after clicking the <Apply> button, will the modifications be completed.
Click <Print> to send the TP information to a file or a printer.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

11.5.2 TP Multiplexing Structure


To open TP mapping, select <Configuration>Æ<TP Multiplexing Structure>.
The <TP Multiplexing Structure> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.11)

Fig. 11.11 TP Multiplexing Structure Query

Select the corresponding Card and then Port. Then click <Query> to view the TP
Multiplexing Structure for the selected port. (See Fig. 11.12)

Fig. 11.12 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 1

Click the circle with a horizontal line to expand the tree, Click the circle with the vertical line
to collapse the tree. Use a right-click on the point and choose Expand to open only this
branch or Expand All to open all the branches including the sub-branches. (See Fig. 11.13)

86 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 11.13 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 2

The point color indicates its status: blue color indicates that this point is vacant and the
brown color indicates it is occupied.green color indicates it is occupied by MS-SPRing
.
If the TP is unused, it can be mapped by highlighting and right-clicking the point. (See Fig.
11.14)

Fig. 11.14 Modify Mapping

After modifications of all the mappings are finished, click <Apply> to confirm the modification.
To check the real-time mapping information, click <Query> at anytime.
Click <Close> to exit the <TP Multiplexing Structure> window.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 87
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

There is no tributary channel numbering present.


i The displaying rule for KLM in LCT (based on timeslot) is compliant with ITU-T G.707
standard.
LCT has supported sorting according to tributary (and it is the default displayed mode), and
there is KLM value. Operator can find the relationship between the timeslot number (TS#)
and tributary number (Trib#) according to table listed below.

TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib# TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib# TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib#
100 111 1 1 200 211 2 22 300 311 3 43
112 22 2 212 23 23 312 24 44
113 43 3 213 44 24 313 45 45
64 65 66
121 4 4 221 5 25 321 6 46
122 25 5 222 26 26 322 27 47
123 46 6 223 47 27 323 48 48
67 68 69
131 7 7 231 8 28 331 9 49
132 28 8 232 29 29 332 30 50
133 49 9 233 50 30 333 51 51
70 71 72
141 10 10 241 11 31 341 12 52
142 31 11 242 32 32 342 33 53
143 52 12 243 53 33 343 54 54
73 74 75
151 13 13 251 14 34 351 15 55
152 34 14 252 35 35 352 36 56
153 55 15 253 56 36 353 57 57
76 77 78
161 16 16 261 17 37 361 18 58
162 37 17 262 38 38 362 39 59
163 58 18 263 59 39 363 60 60
79 80 81
171 19 19 271 20 40 371 21 61
172 40 20 272 41 41 372 42 62
173 61 21 273 62 42 373 63 63
82 83 84
Tab. 11.7 Tributary(Trib#) to KLM to Timeslot(TS#) Numbers Mapping

11.6 Synchronization Management


The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT supports multiple timing references. Each reference
can be configured as an STM-N, TimeIN1, and TimeIN2. Each of the references has 4
levels of priority.
• Right-click the CC Card, and select <Synchronization Management>, or

88 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

• Select <Configuration>Æ<Synchronization Management>


The <Synchronization Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.15)

Fig. 11.15 Synchronization Management

11.6.1 Global Settings


Click <Global Settings> to open the Global Settings of the Synchronization Management.
(See Fig. 11.16)

Fig. 11.16 Global Settings

<QL Mode> enables quality level available or not. Select <Enabled> in the drop-down menu.
When <Enabled> is selected in the <QL Mode> drop-down menu, the <Expected_QL> menu
will be available. Choose <PRC(0×2)>, <SSU-A(0×4)>, <SSU-B(0×8)>, or SEC(0×0B)>
from the drop-down menu.<Frequence Offset Monitor Mode> enables Frequency Offset
Monitoring available or not.
Click <Refresh> to check the real-time status.
Click <Apply> to accept modifications.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 89
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

11.6.2 Configuring the Timing Source of NE


Click <Station Clock> to open the <StationClock Settings> window. (See Fig. 11.17) There
are four I/O routes in one SURPASS hiT 7060, two <Station Clock Input> ports and two
<Station Clock Output> ports. Switch between them by using two tabs. (See Fig. 11.17, Fig.
11.18, and Fig. 11.19)

Fig. 11.17 Station Clock Settings Reference Time IN

Every field is described in the table below:

Fields Descriptions
Monitored Status Can be set as auto, monitored, or
unmonitored
Signal Type Can be set as 2MHz, 2Mbit/s UnFramed, or
2Mbit/s Framed
Sa bit Can be set from Sa4-Sa8
Tab. 11.8 Timing Source Management Time IN Window Parameters

To prevent a loop automatically, check the <Auto Loop Prevention> box.

90 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 11.18 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out

Set the <station clock parameters> in the drop-down menu under the < Station Clock
Output> tab. The parameters include <Monitored Status>, <Signal Type>, and <Sa bit>.
For the chosen signal type, configure the output clock quality including<Output Type>,
<Squelch Mode>, <Threshold>, <Output QL> and <Output Status>. The <Output QL> will
change accordingly.
In the <ClockOut Reference> tab (See Fig. 11.19), configure the reference clock.

Fig. 11.19 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out (Clock Out Reference)

Click <Apply> to accept modifications in each window.


Click <Refresh> to check the real-time status.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

11.6.3 Configuring the System Clock


To configure the system clock, click <System Clock>. (See Fig. 11.15) The <System Clock>
window will appear. (See Fig. 11.20)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 91
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 11.20 System Clock

The Current Reference, The SystemClock State, and Last External Switch Request show the
current timing status and configuration.
The Operation Mode indicates the current operation mode of this NE, including:
<Freerunning> – When Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks cannot
access stored data, or have never had a reference input, they use their own internal clocks
to generate the synchronization signal until the network is restored.
<Holdover>– When the quality of the synchronization inputs falls below accepted levels,
Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks first use stored data to control
phase and frequency variations.
<Auto Selection> – The clock has its frequency phase locked to an input reference signal.
Select one of the three options in the <Operation Mode> field, and then click <SetMode> to
change the mode. When <AutoSelection> is selected, modify the <Request> and
<Reference> settings if <Force> or <Manual> in <Request> has been selected. Click
<Switch> to confirm the changes. If the <Request> state is <Clear>, the <Reference> option
will be grayed out.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

11.6.4 Configuring the Reference


Use <Synchronization Management> window (See Fig. 11.15) to configure the time
reference.
Double-click the corresponding time reference, and a <TimingSource Reference Properties>
window will appear. (See Fig. 11.21)

92 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 11.21 Timing Source Reference Properties

In the <Timing Source Reference Properties> window, the current status of the selected
timing source is shown.
Select the corresponding Priority from 1 (the highest priority) to 999 (the lowest priority).
Check <Lockout> to keep the reference valid.
Check <Monitored> to monitor the reference.
Select the <QL Provisioned Mode> in the drop-down menu; options include <Auto> or
<Provisioning> modes. In the <Auto> mode, the QL cannot be changed, while in the
<Provisioning> mode, the QL can be set to a given value.
When setting the <QL Provisioned Mode> to Provisioning, select the desired quality level in
the drop-down menu. The QL levels include:
PRC (Primary Reference Clock): A reference frequency standard comprising an ensemble of
PRS that provide a reference frequency signal compliant with ITU G.811 or ETSI EN 300
462-6-1. The free run accuracy of PRC must be 10-11.
SSU-A (Quality Level - SSU Transit): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock
source is traceable to a transit node SSU and should be indicated using a '0100' code.
SSU-B (Quality Level - SSU Local): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock
source is traceable to a local node SSU and should be indicated using a '1000' code.
SEC (Quality Level – SEC): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock source is
traceable to an SEC and should be indicated using a '1011' code.
DNU (Quality Level - Do Not Use): One of the SSM codes. Do Not Use for Synchronization
code is used to prevent timing loops and is transmitted in the opposite direction on interfaces
used to synchronize equipment’s clock denoted by <1111>.
If user wants to monitor frequency offset, select <Monitored> in <Frequence Offset
Monitored> dropdown menu, and the <Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence
Offset Lower Threshold> properties become available. Otherwise select <Non-
Monitored> ,<Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence Offset Lower Threshold>
properties become grey and unavailable.
Select the <Frequence Offset Monitor Mode> in the drop-down menu; options include
<Monitored> and <Non-Monitored>
<Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence Offset Lower Threshold> define the
maximum and the minimum frequency offset.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 93
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In <Frequence Offset>, current frequency offset is shown.


Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving.

11.7 EOW Configuration


In chassis view, select <Configuration>Æ<EOW Configuration> to set the Engineering Order
Wire. The <EOW Config window> will appear. (See Fig. 11.22 )

Fig. 11.22 EOW Config Window

To disable EOW settings, click the box to the left of the corresponding Disable box.
To enable the EOW, set the correct card, port, and channel.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information of EOW.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.
Click <Print> to print the information.

94 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

12 Ethernet Configuration and Management


Note: Some configurations and menus below are based on Ethernet cards supporting Layer2
i service.

12.1 Bridge Configuration


There is one way to open the <Bridges Properties> window:
Right-click the corresponding Ethernet card and select <Bridge Configuration> in pop-up
menu.
The <Bridge Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.1)

Fig. 12.1 Bridge Properties

The <Bridge Properties> section can display the current NE, Card name, and the status of
the bridge in corresponding items.
Select the type of tag needed from the <Bridge Mode> drop-down menu. Available values
are <IEEE 802> mode, when the native frame will not be tagged and <Double Tagging>
mode, when the native frame will be tagged.
Note: The definition of “tagged” or “untagged” frame is as follow:
i 1) For IEEE 802.3 Tag Bridge Mode (Ethernet Type value of Bridge is “0x8100”): If the
incoming frame is been tagged and the Ethernet Type value in the first tag is equal to
“0x8100”, then we call it “tagged”; if the incoming frame is without a tag or if with a tag, but
the Ethernet Type value in the first tag (after Destination Address field) is not equal to
“0x8100”, then we call it “untagged”.
2) For Double Tag Bridge Mode (Ethernet Type value of Brideg is not equal to “0x8100”,
default value is “0xFFFF”): If the incoming frame is tagged and the Ethernet Type value is
equal to that of local Double Tag Bridge, then we call it “tagged”; if the incoming frame is

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 95
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

without a tag or if with a tag, but the Ethernet Type value of the first tag in the incoming
customer frame is not equal to that of local Double Tag Bridge, then we call it “untagged”.

Input a text string in the <Label> field to help identify this bridge.
<MAC aging time> indicates the living time of MAC address. Different cards have different
aging time range:
1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the range is from 10s to 630s, in step of 10s, 300s by defaut;
2) For a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the range is from 20s to 75minutes, in step of 14s, 300s by
default.

i Note: For different card types, there are different algorithms to get the actual value of MAC
aging timing from the value setted in the window. Only with a correct description can an
operator use the time.
1) For the 2×GE+8×FE /AE card, the range of actual value of aging time is between
( integer[aging/14] ×13) to (integer[aging/14] ×14). The expression of integer[aging/14]
means to get the integer part of aging/14, while aging is the setted valuel in the window.
2) For the 6xFE card, the range of actual value of aging time is from (aging) to (aging×2),
while expression of aging is the same as front.

For different card types, The output rate of port rate limiting and vlan+port rate limiting can
be calculated by the following ways.
1) for 6FE/L2:
The output rate of port rate limiting can be calculated by the following formula(same with
VLAN rate limiting).
Ltotal
Vo = Vlim it ×
Ltotal − l src − l des − ltag − llength − lcrc
Vo : output rate
Vlimit : limiting rate
Ltotal : total frame size(including 4 CRC Bytes)
lsrc : SourceMAC Address size, 6 Bytes
ldes : DestinationMAC Address size, 6 Bytes
ltag : 4 Tag Bytes
llength : 2 frame length Bytes
lcrc : 4 CRC Bytes
2) for 32wan:
the output rate is just same with port limit rate.

Below this window, there are two tables, which list all LAN and WAN ports. Click the tab to
change the table between them. After selecting one port, double-click it to see more detail
information about this port.

Note: MUT configuration is at <Card property configuration>.


i
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to confirm the modification if the user wants this window closed.
Click <Cancel> to quit the window. All unsaved changes will be lost.

96 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Print> to print the information of the bridges properties.


Click< Help> to launch the online help.

12.2 LAN Card Configuration and Management


LAN card configuration and management is similar to SDH card configuration and
management.
To open the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window, follow the steps below:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card and,
Right click the card, and select <Lan Ports Property Configuration> to open the <LAN Port
Property Configuration> window without a specific port defined. The operator can specify a
unique port by selecting one from the <Port> drop-down menu. Or:
Select the corresponding port in the Ethernet card, right click on it, and select <LAN Ports
Property Configuration> to open the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window with a
specific port defined

Note: For 2×GE+8×FE/AE cards, there are two interfaces on a single physical Ethernet
i port. In detail, FE Port 1 and 5 share physical port 1; 2 and 6 share port 2, 3 and 7 share port
3, and 4 and 8 share port 4. If the user right-clicks one FE port on such a card and selects
<LAN Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu, a window will first pop up to let the
user choose a specific port before the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window appears.
On the panel of a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, there are two LEDs beside each RJ-45 connector,
indicating the link and data receiving/transmitting status for the two Ethernet ports on the RJ-
45 respectively. For example, as to physical RJ-45 port1, the left LED is used for Ethernet
port 5, and the right LED is used for Ethernet port 1. LED “ON” means the link of the
Ethernet port is set up, “FLASH” means there are data being received or transmitted, while
“OFF” means the link of the Ethernet port is down.

The <LAN Port Property Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.2)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 97
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.2 LAN Port Property Configuration (1)

12.2.1 LAN Port Properties


<Monitored Mode> – Can be set as <Auto>, <Monitor>, or <Non-Monitor>.
<Admin Mode> – Can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>.
<Port Type>: FE or GE port.
<Port Label>: The port name defined by user to distinguish different ports. It can be changed
in this window.
<PVID>: The PVID is the Port VLAN Identification. Only one PVID can be specified for each
port. The optional value is 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094, while 0, 1001 – 1024 and 4095 are
reserved by system. If the <Bridge Mode> is set to be <Double Tag> in the <Bridges
Properties> window, the PVID must be set on LAN ports.
<Link Status>: Up or Down. Specify the port situation based on the link transmission
direction.
<BroadCast Rate Limit (%)>: User can control broadcast storm via configure this attribute.
Select this attribute enable or disable and input the corresponding value in the blank. The
range of the value is 1% – 100%, in step of 1%. The default value is 30%.
<Port ALS Mode>: Can be set as <No Command>, <Manual Restart> or <Manual Test>.
<Auto Laser Shutdown>: Yes or No. Specify whether auto laser shundown is permitted.

98 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619
Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<Egress Tag Mode> – Can be set as <Untag> or <Tag>. When it is configured as <Tag>, it
will keep the outer tag in the egress of the LAN port. When it is configured as <Untag>, it will
strip the outer tag.
<Broadcase Rate Limit (%)> – User can control broadcast storm via configure this attribute.
Select this attribute enabled or disabled and input the corresponding value in the blank. The
range of the value is 1% - 100%, in step of 1% with 30% as the default value.
For Ethernet/T card, there is one more menu:
<Port Disabled on CSF/TLCT> – The available choices are false and true. Enabling/disabling
can be set by operator according to CSF/TLCT defect information, default is disabling.

In the <Input Rate Limiting> section, the selection can be <Not Applied> or other two items,
<Port+VLAN Based> and <Port Based>, please refer to Chapter 12.2.2.
In the <Auto-Negotiation Parameter> section, if <Enabled> is selected in the <Auto-
Negotiation> field, the other three parameters will be greyed out. If <Disabled> is selected,
set these three parameters manually.
<Auto Negotiation>: It can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>. When <Disable> is selected,
the Flow Control, Port Speed and Duplex Mode must be specified by user. When <Enable>
is selected, these three attributes can be auto set according the application and the
corresponding button is unavailable.
<Flow Control>: Enabled or Disabled.
<Duplex Mode>: Full or Half.
<Port Speed>: 10M or 100M.
<MDI/MDIX Mode>: Auto, MDI, or MDIX. Its value can not be change when the Auto
Negotiation field is set as Enabled. MDI means medium dependent interface- straight, while
MDIX means medium dependent interface- cross-over.
i Note: This item is only available for the LAN Port Property Configuration window for FE LAN
Port.
If <Keep Original CoS> is checked, the correlation of original priorities and the system
priority will be set as follow: Lowest – 1/2; Low – 0/3; High – 4/5; Highest – 6/7. Otherwise if
the other two is checked, please refer to Chapter 12.2.3.
In the <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> section, <WRR>, <WFQ> or <Strictly> can be
selected from drop-down menu of Algorithm. Mode can be set as <Mode 1> or <Mode 2>.
By click <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> button, egress priority weight can be
changed, please refer to Chapter 12.2.4.
The <Port Status> section shows the status of LAN port, the attributes are the same as SDH
port status (See Tab. 11.3)

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.


Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to confirm the modification and close the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved changes will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

When the Ethernet card is transparent card, the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window
will appear as Fig. 12.3.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 99
User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.3 LAN Port Property Configuration (2)

i Note: Differnet cards support different maximum frame size and dynamic MAC address table
size:
1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the supported maximum frame size is 1536 bytes and the dynamic
MAC address table size is 63K available for customer;
2) For a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the supported maximum frame size is 1536 or 1800 bytes if
the frame is tagged. Otherwise, the supported maximum frame size is always 1522
bytes. And the dynamic MAC address table size is 8K available for customer;;
3) For a 2×GE/T or 8×FT/T card, the supported maximum frame size is 1536 or 1800
bytes.

12.2.2 VLAN Rate Limiting


In the <Lan Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.2), for the <Input Rate
Limiting> section, choose <Port+VLAN Based> and then click the button. The <VLAN Rate
Limit Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.4)

100 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.4 VLAN Rate Limit Configuration

All the VLAN Rate Limit information will be displayed in the <VLAN Rate Limit Configuration>
window.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Add> to create a new VLAN Rate Limit. (See Fig. 12.5)
Click <Delete> to delete the selected VLAN Rate Limit.
Click <Modify> to modify the selected VLAN Rate Limit.
Click <Close> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

Fig. 12.5 Add VLAN Rate Limit

In the <Add VLAN Rate Limit> window, input the ID of VLAN in the <VLAN ID> field.
In the <Rate Limit> field, input the rate limite.

i Note: Different ports on different cards have different rate limit ranges.
For FE ports on a 6xFE/L2 card, the range is from 200k to 100M, in step of 1k.
On a 2xGE+8xFE/AE card, for FE ports, the range is 64kbps to 100Mbps, in step of 64kbps,
while for GE ports, the range is 64kbps to 1000Mbps, also in step of 64kbps. On a single
card, up to 8 levels of granularity can be simultaneously supported.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 101


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications and continue adding VLAN Rate Limit.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit this window.
Click <Close> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: 1) The maximum capacity of "port+VLAN" based rate limit table per card is 2k, while
i for a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 86.
2) The maximum capacity of "port+VLAN" based rate limit table per NE is 8k.

In the <Lan Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.2), for the <Input Rate
Limiting> section, choose <Port Based> and input the maximum rate with the unit of kbps.
The range is from 200kbps to 100Mbps, in step of 1kbps.

12.2.3 CoS Configuration


In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.2), select <Port+VLAN
Based> in the <Ingress CoS Configuration> field and click the button, the <VLAN+Port CoS
Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.6)

Fig. 12.6 VLAN+Port CoS Configuration

All the VLAN CoS information will be displayed in the <VLAN+Port CoS Configuration>
window.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Add> to create a new VLAN CoS. (See Fig. 12.7)
Click <Delete> to delete the selected VLAN CoS.
Click <Modify> to modify the selected VLAN CoS.
Click <Close> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

102 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.7 Add VLAN CoS

In the <Add VLAN CoS> window, input the VLAN ID in the <VLAN ID> field.
In the <CoS> dropdown menu, select the corresponding rate for this VLAN. There are four
classes can be set: <Lowest>, <Low>, <High>, and <Highest>.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications and continue adding VLAN Cos.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit this window.
Click <Close> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: 1) The maximum capacity of port+VLAN based CoS table per card is 2k, while for a 2
i ×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 86.
2) The maximum capacity of port+VLAN based CoS table per NE is 8k.

In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.2), select <Port Based> in the
<Ingress CoS Configuration> field and select <Lowest>, <Low>, <High>, or <Highest> from
the drop-down menu.

12.2.4 Priority Algorithm Configuration


In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (see Fig. 12.2), there is an <Egress
Priority Weight Configuration> tab where:
<Algorithm>: Can be set as <WRR> (weighted round robin) or <Strictly> (strict priority). For a
port on a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the Algorithm can be set as <WFQ> (Weighted Fair
Queuing) or <Scrictly>.
<Mode>: <Default> or <Mode2>.
i Note: Egress port mode is related to HOL (Head of Line) issue, which means if incoming
frames from different ports are forwarded by an egress port, when the egress port queue is
congested (incoming rate is rapid than outgoing rate), we call it HOL issue. When HOL issue
is happened, CoS in egress port may have problem under “mode1”, which means in “mode1”,
internal HOL function will be disabled, flow control will take effective, but CoS will not be
accurate again. In order to solve CoS inaccurate issue, we also support “mode2”, in this
mode2, HOL function will be enabled, CoS can be accurate, but flow control function will be
disabled, and egress port will discard overflow frames according to CoS priority. Please be
notified, the “flow control” function mentioned above is internal flow control in L2 Swtich in
which flow control is sent from egress port to all related incoming ports in the same L2
Switch.
Click <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> to enter the <Egress Priority Weight
Configuration> window. (See Fig. 12.8)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 103


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.8 Egress Priority Weight Configuration

Click <Refresh> to check the Priority Weight.


Click <Modify> to modify the Priority Weight in a new window.
Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.
For example, to modify one Priority Weight, choose it and click <Modify>, the Modify Priority
Weight window will appear. (See Fig. 12.9 ) Fill in the Priority Weight desired and click
<Apply>.

Fig. 12.9 Modify Priority Weight

i Note: For a 6×FE/L2 or 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the valid Priority Weight value ranges from 1
to 240, in step of 1.

12.3 WAN Port Configuration


To configure WAN Ports, use the following method to open the <WAN Port Configuration>
window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click the card, and select <Wan Ports Property
Configuration> in the pop-up menu.
The <WAN Port Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.10)

104 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.10 WAN Port Configuration (1)

When the Ethernet card is transparent card, the WAN port configuration window will be
different. (See Fig. 12.11)

Fig. 12.11 WAN Port Configuration (2)

Choose the port before enter <WAN Port Configuration> window.


The settings of the <Properties>, <Ingress Cos Configuration> and <Egress Priority Weight
Configuration> sections in this window are the same as that in the <LAN Port Configuration>
window.
When the <Egress Tag Mode> is set to <Tag>, the WAN port can add an outer Tag in the
frame according to the PVID specified and deliver it to the LAN port.
In the <Bandwidth Management> section, enable or disable LCAS, when LCAS is enabled,
<HoldOff Time(ms)> which specifies the living time can be set. Then click <Bandwidth
Management> for detailed settings. (See Fig. 12.12)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 105


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.12 Bandwidth Management

In the <Target> field, the information of Card and Port to be configured is listed.
In the <Direction Configuration field>, select this WAN port's service direction: <bi-direction>
or <uni-direction>.
In the <TP Type>, listed TP types can be selected.
In the <Bandwidth Management> field, the user can set Source and Sink bandwidth
respectively.
All available TPs are listed in the left column, including TP's series number and status.
Select enough numbers of TPs and click the "=>" button. All the selected TPs will be listed in
the right column. Click the botton "<=" to delete a selected TP.
For example, to set bandwidth to 4Mb, choose VC4-1 and VC4-2 (Other AUGs can be
chosen from the left table) by clicking "=>".

i Note: Different card has different backplane bandwidth. And the number of VCs which can
be set on a WAN port is limited. The limitations are listed in the table below.

Card 6×FE/L2 2×GE+8×FE/AE 8×FE/T 2×GE/T


Backplane 8*VC-4 (shared by
1*VC-4 (shared by 1*VC-4 (shared 16*VC-4 (shared
Bandwidth 1×GE and 31×FE
2 FE WAN ports) by 8 WAN) by 2 WAN)
of the card WAN ports)

106 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

1~46*VC12 per 1~46*VC12 per FE 1~46*VC12 per


VC12-Xv /
WAN port WAN port WAN port
1~3 VC3 1~3 VC3
Limitation: EM3+ Limitation:
can not support EM3+ can not
VC3-Xv and VC12- support VC3-
Xv simultanteously; Xv; while EM3- 1~21 VC3 for each
while EM3-PT can PT can support WAN (1~24 for
VC3-Xv /
support VC3-Xv VC3-Xv and WAN1, 25~48 for
and VC12-Xv VC12-Xv. NE WAN2)
simultaneously. NE and SNM/LCT
and SNM/LCT wil wil define
define related trap related trap to
to indicate indicate
1~7 per WAN port
1~7 for GE WAN
VC4-Xv / / (1~8 for WAN1,
port
9~16 for WAN2)
Tab. 12.1 Bandwidth limitations for Ethernet cards and WAN ports

Note: For 2×GE/T card, when in slot 1, 2, 5, 6, there are only 4 AU4s, thus 4 VC4, or 4×3
VC3, and all thers VC4 or VC3 are available for either WAN1 or WAN2. When in slot 7,8,
there are 16 AU4, thus 16 VC4 or 16×3 VC3, only those VC4 or VC3 in 1-8 AU4 are for
WAN1, and VC4 or VC3 in 9-16 for WAN2.
Click <Refresh> to get latest information.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to confirm the modification with this window closed.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved changes will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

When click <Summary of Virtual Containers>, the window listing VC assignment will be
shown (See Fig. 12.13).

Fig. 12.13 Summary of Virtual Containers

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 107


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

12.4 WAN Ports TP Structure


To open WAN Ports TP Structure window:
Right click the Ethernet card, select WAN Ports TP Structure in the pop-up menu (See Fig.
12.14)

Fig. 12.14 WAN Ports TP Structure

Different card supports different mapping. And the types of VCs are listed in the table below.
Card 6×FE/L2 2×GE+8×FE/AE 8×FE/T 2×GE/T

VCs TUG-3(VC3/VC12) AU-4(VC4/VC12) TUG-3(VC3/VC12) AU-4(VC3/VC4)

Tab. 12.2 Type of VCs for Ethernet cards

i Note:For 2xGE/T card VC3 and VC4 can not existed simultaneously.

If you want to map this TP into VC12, select VC12 and click <OK> or <Apply> to put the
modification into effect.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

12.5 VLAN Management


There is one way to open the <VLAN Management> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <VLAN Management> in the
pop-up menu.
The <VLAN Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.15)
In the <Query Condition> section, fill in the conditions to narrow the VLAN results that will
appear.

108 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.15 VLAN Management

i Note: VLAN range: 2xGE+8xFE/AE card has only 1021 active for costomer simultaneously.

Click <Query>, all VLANs based on the query conditions will show in the list.
Choose one VLAN record, by clicking <VLAN Configuration>, a new window will appear
which will enable the VLAN record to be modified. (See Fig. 12.16)
Click <Delete>, to delete the VLAN selected.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Print> to print the VLAN information.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 109


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.16 VLAN Configuration Based on VLAN

In the <VLAN Management> window opened by clicking the <VLAN Configuration> button,
use the <Based on VLAN> tab to reset VLAN ID and VLAN Name, and to select ports.
Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.
Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: Allowed customer VLAN ID value is 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094. 0, 1001 – 1024 and
i 4095 are reserved by system.

110 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Use the <Based on Ports> tab to modify the VLAN List. (See Fig. 12.17)

Fig. 12.17 VLAN Configuration Based on Ports

Select the Port in the drop-down menu and enter the VLAN ID number in the <VLAN List>
field.
When configuring a list of VLANs correlated to the port, the operator can use one of the
following syntaxes:
For a list of VLANs:
- VLANx, VLANy, VLANz,…
For a range of VLANs:
- VLANx/VLANz
Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.
Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

12.6 Static MAC Address Configuration


To configure Static MAC Address, use the following method to open the <Static MAC
Address Configuration> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and click <Static MAC Address
Configuration> in pop-up menu.
The <Static MAC Address Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.18) The VLAN
IDs and Ports of all the MAC Addresses will be listed in this window.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 111


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.18 Static MAC Address Configuration

Select the corresponding MAC; click <Delete> to delete existing MAC. Click <Modify> to
modify the port of the item currently highlighted in the table.
To add a new MAC Address, click <Add>. An <Add MAC Address> window will appear. (See
Fig. 12.19)

Fig. 12.19 Add MAC Address

Input the <MAC Address>, <VLAN ID> and select the corresponding port in the drop-down
menu.
Click <Apply> to confirm the action and continue adding other MAC Address.
Click <OK> to confirm the action and close the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window, all unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

112 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Note: The maximum capacity of Static MAC address table per card is 2k.
i
i Note: The operator can configure the <VLAN Management> window and the <Static MAC
Address Configuration> window independently, which means when the operator configures
the “VLAN Static MAC Address”, the configured item will not be written into “VLAN
Management”. But in order to make the “VLAN Static MAC Address” configuration take
effective, related “VLAN Management” must be configured in advance. The port and VLAN
relationship should be configured correctly. Otherwise, the “VLAN Static MAC Address”
configuration will not take effective even though it is configured successfully.

12.7 ACL Configuration


ACL (Access Control List) is used to manage MAC addresses access. Use the following
method to open the <ACL Configuration> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <ACL Configuration>.
The <ACL Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.20)

Fig. 12.20 ACL Configuration

Click <Add> and a new window will appear and new ACL can be added in this window. (See
Fig. 12.21)

i Note: 1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the maximum capacity of ACL address table per card is 2k
(source MAC and destination MAC altogether), while for a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value
is 79.
2) The maximum capacity of static unicast MAC address table (including ACL items) per NE
is 8k.

Click <Delete>, the chosen ACL will immediately be deleted.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 113


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.


Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Fig. 12.21 Add ACL

12.8 Static Multicast Configuration


To configure Group Broadcast, use the following method to open the <Group Broadcast
Configuration> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select < Static Multicast
Configuration>.
The <Static Multicast Configuration> window will appear. All MAC Addresses and Port
Settings will be listed in this window. (See Fig. 12.22)

Fig. 12.22 Static Multicast Configuration

To delete a MAC Address, select the corresponding MAC and click <Delete>.
To add a new MAC Address, click <Add>. A new <Add GroupBroadcast> window will appear.
(See Fig. 12.23)
Click <Modify> to modify the MAC Address currently highlighted in the table.

114 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.


Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Fig. 12.23 Add MAC Address

Input the MAC Address.


Select the port in the <Available Ports> panel, and click the ==> button, to add it to the
<Select Ports> panel.
Click <Apply> to confirm the action and continue adding other MAC Addresses.
Click <OK> to confirm the action and close the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: 1) The Maximum capacity of Group Broadcast MAC address (include static and
i dynamic) table per card is 24, while for a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 254.
2) The Maximum capacity of Group Broadcast MAC address (include static and dynamic)
table per NE is 8k.

12.9 IGMP Snooping


IGMP Snooping indicates dynamic multicast status. The user can retrieve the relationship
between the group MAC address, the group IP address and all port mumbers in a specified
dynamic multicast group.
Use the following method to open the <RSTP Properties Configuration> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select < IGMP Snooping >.
The < IGMP Snooping > window will appear. (See Fig. 12.24)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 115


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.24 IGMP Snooping-IP Multicast Group

In the window, there are three tabs:<IP Multicast Group>,<Mac Multicast Group> and <Vlan
Multicast Router>.(See Fig. 12.24, Fig. 12.25 and Fig. 12.26) Switch between them by using
the tabs.

Fig. 12.25 IGMP Snooping-Mac Multicast Group

116 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.26 IGMP Snooping- Vlan Multicast Router

In the window, Select <enable> from the IGMP Snooping dropdown menu to enable IGMP
Snooping.Modify the <Ageing Time>options.

<Aging time> indicates the living time of MAC address. Different cards have different aging
time range:
1) For a 6×FE/L2 card,and a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the range is from 100s to 2000s, in step
of 1s;

In the <IP Multicast Goup>, <Mac Multicast Group> or <Vlan Multicast Router> window:
Click <Refresh> to list the corresponding Multicast Group settings.
Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.

12.10 RSTP Configuration


Use the following method to open the <RSTP Properties Configuration> window:
Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <RSTP Configuration>.
The <RSTP Properties Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.27)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 117


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 12.27 RSTP Properties Configuration

In the window, modify the <Max Age>, <Forward Delay>, <Hello Time> and <Switch
Priority> options.
Click <Refresh> to check the real-time port RSTP properties.
Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.
Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Cancel> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Print> to print the information of RSTP Properties.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Double-click a row to view the port RSTP properties. (See Fig. 12.28)

Fig. 12.28 Port RSTP Configuration

In the window, modify <Port Priority>, <Path Cost>, and set <Port Enable> to Disabled or
Enabled. Port Role and Status are for read only.
Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.
Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

118 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

13 RPR Configuration and Management

13.1 RPR Station Configuration


To configure an RPR station, right-click an RPR card and select <RPR Station
Configuration>. (See Fig. 13.1) The <RPR Station Configuration> window will appear.

Fig. 13.1 Open RPR Station Configuration

13.1.1 RPR Station Basic Configuration


After you open the <RPR Station Configuration> window, you will see the <Basic
Configuration> panel. (See Fig. 13.2)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 119


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.2 RPR Station Configuration

The following parameters are listed in this panel and the user can modify these parameters
according to his/her needs.
− <Station Label>: Set by operator to identify this station.
− <Ring Label>: The label identifies the ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <MAC Address>: Input the appropriate MAC address for this RPR Node.
− <Fairness Algorithm>: Available values are <aggressive> or <conservative>.
− <Passthrough Mode>: Available values are <enabled> or <disabled>. If the attribute is
set to <enabled>, then the node cannot be auto-discovered in the RPR topology.
− <Drop Bad FCS>: Available values are <yes> and <no>.
− <Keepalive TimeOut>: If no keepalive is received within this time, a signal fail condition
is assumed. Range: [2 milliseconds, 200 milliseconds]; Resolution: 1 millisecond; Default:
3 milliseconds
− <Ringlet 0 hops to the station>: The maximum number of hops between this station and
ringlet0.
− <Ringlet 1 hops to the station>: The maximum number of hops between this station and
ringlet1.
− <Attribute Discovery Timer>: Seperate timer to control frequency with wich station
attributes are propagated. The default value is 1 sec, with a range from 50 ms to 10 sec
and a granularity of 50 ms.
− <Alarm Monitor>: Available values are <enabled> or <disabled>
Note: User can only modify <Station Label>, <Ring label> and <MAC Address> in this
i window.

120 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the RPR Station Configuration window, the bandwidth setting is in the < Reserved/Pre-
Allocated service bandwidth from the station to each ringlet> panel.
The following parameters will be listed in this panel. The user can modify these parameters
according to his or her needs.
− <Maximum Bandwidth (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum bandwidth of ringlet0.
− <Maximum Bandwidth (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum bandwidth of ringlet1.
− <Conservative Bandwidth (Ringlet 0): The conservative bandwidth allowed from this
station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of the
ringlet0.
− <Conservative Bandwidth (Ringlet 1): The conservative bandwidth allowed from this
station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of the
ringlet1.
− <Total Reserved A0 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed to ringlet0.
− <Total Reserved A0 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed to ringlet1.
− <Local Reserved A0 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed from this station
to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A0
in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the
TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.
− <Local Reserved A0 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed from this station
to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A0
in the ringlet1. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the
TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.
− <Pre-Allocated A1 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A1 bandwidth allowed from this station to
ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A1 in
the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-
M will prompt operator and reject to configure.
− <Pre-Allocated A1 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A1 bandwidth allowed from this station to
ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A in
the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-
M will prompt operator and reject to configure.
− <Pre-Allocated B-CIR (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum B-CIR bandwidth allowed from this
station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of
service B- CIR in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the
ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.
− <Pre-Allocated B-CIR (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum B-CIR bandwidth allowed from this
station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of
service B- CIR in the ringlet. If configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the
ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

13.1.2 RPR Station Fairness Configuration


In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Fairness> button to enter <RPR
Station Fairness Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.3)

Fig. 13.3 Basic Fairness Configuration

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 121


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Advanced> to view more options. (See Fig. 13.4) Click <Basic> to return basic
configuration.

Fig. 13.4 Advanced Fairness Configuration

The following parameters will be shown in the advanced or basic configuration. These
parameters can be modified according to user needs.
− <Ring Label>: The label identifies the ring. It is the same as the parameter used in the
Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <Station Label>: The label identifies the station. It is the same as the parameter used in
the Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <Ringlet ID>: Available values are <Ringlet 0> and <Ringlet 1>. It is the same as the
parameter used in the Basic Configuration.
− <MAC Address>: The MAC address for this RPR Node. It is the same as the parameter
used in the Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <Weight>: It is effective for class B and C service. The allowed range is [1, 16]. The
default value is 1. It is same as parameter in the Basic Configuration.
− <Maximum Allowed Rate>: The maximum value that the station is allowed to transmit
local excess traffic to the ringlet .The default value is the physical ring rate.
− <Advertisement Ratio>: The ratio between the link capacity reserved for fairness control
messages and the total link capacity.The range is from 0.00025 to 0.01 with the step of
0.00025. The default value is 0.00125.
− <Age Coefficient>: The allowed range is [0, 4]; the default value is 2.
− <Ramp-up Coefficient>: The allowed values are 1, 2, 3, …, 9.
− <Ramp-down Coefficient>: The allowed values are 1, 2, 3, …, 9.
− <Low-pass Coefficient>: The allowed range is [4, 9]; the default value is 6.
− <Active Weights Coefficient>: Indicates the number of agingIntervals that elapse
between successive computations of activeWeights.
− <STQ High Threshold>: It is set by the operator.
− <STQ Medium Threshold>: It is set by the operator.
− <STQ Low Threshold>: It is set by the operator.
Click <Restore Default> to set all parameters to default values.
Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.

122 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.


Click <Refresh> to check the real-time port RSTP properties.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

13.1.3 RPR Station OAM Configuration


In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <OAM> button to enter <RPR Station
OAM Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.5)

Fig. 13.5 OAM Configuration

The <RPR Station OAM Configuration> window is divided to three panels: Basic Information,
<OAM Request>, and <OAM Response>.
The panel on the top of the window lists the basic information:
− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this
window.
− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <MAC Address>: The MAC address for this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in
this window.

The parameters in the <OAM Request> panel are listed as below:


− <Destination Address>: Shows where the OAM request will be sent.
− <Action Type>: Available values are <echo> or <flush>.
− <Class of Service>: There are three classes of service: <Class A>, <Class B> and
<Class C>.
− <Request Ringlet>: The ringlet ID on which the OAM request should be sent.
− <Response Ringlet>: The ringlet ID which answers for the responding request.
− <Request Count>: Shows the number of requests.
− <User Data>: The data sent by the operator with length of the string is 20 bytes.
− <TimeOut>: Available range is from 10ms to 100ms with the step of 10ms.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 123


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

The parameters in the <OAM Response> panel are listed as below:


− <Response Count>: Shows the number of responses.
− <Response Status>: Available values are <unknown>, <in process>, <error> or
<success>.
− <Average Response Time>: Can be set from 0 to 65535.

13.1.4 RPR Station Protection Configuration


In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Station Protection Property> button to
enter the <RPR Station Protection Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.6)

Fig. 13.6 RPR Station Protection Configuration

The following parameters are shown in the <RPR Station Protection Configuration> window:
− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this
window.
− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in
this window.
− <Protection Mode>: Can be set to <steering>, <wrapping> and <resteering after
wrapping>.
− <Reversion Mode>: Indicates whether reversion mode is used. Available values are
<yes> and <no>.
− <Wait to Restore Time>: Indicates the length of time to remain in the protection state.
The value range is from 0 to 1440 seconds.

13.1.5 RPR Station Span Protection Switch Configuration


In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Span Protection Switch> button to
enter the <Span Protection Switch> window. (See Fig. 13.7)

124 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.7 Span Protection Switch

The following parameters are in the <Span Protection Switch> window:


− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It can not be changed in this window.
− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It can not be changed in this window.
− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It can not be changed in this
window.
− <Span ID>: Available values are <East Span> or <West Span>.
− <External Command>: Available values are: <idle>, <manual switch> and <forced
switch>. If set to <idle>, no Protection will be used.
− <Hold Off Timer>: It indicates the waiting time before switch. The value is from 0 to 500
milliseconds
− <Neighbor Protection Status>: Indicates that neighbor protection status is valid or invalid.
Available values are <active> and <inactive>.
− <Protection Count>: The number of times protection that has been used.
− <Protection Duration>: Indicates the amount of time the protection mode lasted.

The following parameters are in the <Protection Status of Span> panel:


− <West Span>: It shows current west span protection status.
− <East Span>: It shows current east span protection status

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.


Click <Apply> to confirm the creation, and continue other creation.
Click <Close> to quit this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

13.2 RPR Client Port Configuration


To open the <RPR Client Port Config> window, follow steps below:
Select the corresponding RPR card and then
Right click the card, and select <RPR Client Ports Property Configuration> to open the <RPR
Client Port Config> window without a specific port defined. The operator can specify a
unique port by selecting one from the <Port> drop-down menu. Or:
Select the corresponding port in the RPR card, right-click on it, and select <RPR Client Ports
Property Configuration> to open the <RPR Client Port Config> window with a specific port
defined

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 125


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Note: For 2×GE+8×FE/RPR cards, there are two interfaces on a single physical Ethernet
i port. In detail, FE Port 1 and 5 share physical port 1; 2 and 6 share port 2, 3 and 7 share port
3, and 4 and 8 share port 4. If the user right-clicks one FE port on such a card and selects
<RPR Client Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu, a window will first pop up to
let the user choose a specific port before the <RPR Port Configuration> window appears.
On the panel of a 2×GE+8×FE/RPR card, there are two LEDs beside each RJ-45 connector,
indicating the link and data receiving/transmitting status for the two Ethernet ports on the RJ-
45 respectively. For example, as to physical RJ-45 port1, the left LED is used for Ethernet
port 5, and the right LED is used for Ethernet port 1. LED “ON” means the link of the
Ethernet port is set up, “FLASH” means there are data being received or transmitted, while
“OFF” means the link of the Ethernet port is down.

The <RPR Client Port Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.8)

Fig. 13.8 RPR Client Port Config

The panel on the top of the window lists the basic information:
− <Ring Label>: The label identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.
− <Station Label>: The label identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this
window.
− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in
this window.
In the top panel, select the port you want to configure in the <Port> drop-down menu.
In the middle panel, you can view and set the properties of this port:
− <Port Mode>: Available values are <Auto>, <Monitor>, and <Not-Monitor>.
− <Admin Status>: Available values are <Up> and <Down>.
− <Auto Laser Shutdown>: Available values are <Yes> and <No>.
In the Auto-Negotiation Parameter panel, there are four parameters: <Auto-Negotiation>,
<Flow Control>, <Duplex Mode>, and <Port Speed>. If <Enable> is selected in the <Auto-

126 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Negotiation> field, the other three parameters will be greyed out. If not, these three
parameters need to be setup manually.
The Status of the port will be displayed in the <Port Status> panel.
i Note: For a 2×GE+8×FE/RPR card, the supported maximum frame size is 1897 Bytes and
the dynamic MAC address table size is 8K (for attached L2 Bridge).

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.


Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to confirm the modification if you want this window closed.
Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

13.3 RPR WAN Port Configuration


To configure RPR WAN Ports, use the following method to open the <RPR WAN Port
Config> window:
Select the RPR card, right-click this card, and select <RPR WAN Ports Property
Configuration> in the pop-up menu.
Then the <RPR WAN Port Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.9)

Fig. 13.9 RPR WAN Port Config

Select the WAN port you want to configure from the <Port> drop-down menu.
Select the alarm monitor type from the <Alarm Monitored> drop-down menu. Available
values are <Auto>, <Monitor> and <Non-monitor>.
In the <Bandwidth Configuration> panel, click the <BandWidth Configuration> button for
detailed setting. The <BandWidth Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.10)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 127


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.10 Bandwidth Configuration

In the <Bandwidth Configuration> window simply choose from the available AUGs in the
<Available AUGs> window and click the “=>” button to move them to the <Selected AUGs>
panel.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to confirm the modification with this window closed.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved changes will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Note: 1) So far, only bidirection is supported.


i
2) The backplane bandwidth of a 2×GE+8×FE/RPR card is 16*VC-4. Each WAN can
has 1 – 8*VC-4.

13.4 RPR Static MultiCast configuration


In static multicast configuration, user can attach many client ports of one station to one MAC
address, and perform multicast. To configure group broadcast, select the RPR card, right-
click this card, and select <Static Multicast configuration>. The <Static Multicast
Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.11)

128 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.11 Static MultiCast Configuration

All MAC Addresses and Port Settings will be listed in this window.
To delete a MAC Address, select the corresponding MAC address and click <Delete>.
Click <Modify> to modify the selected MAC address in the <Add/Modify Static Multicast>
window.
To add a new MAC Address, click <Add>. The <Add/Modify Static Multicast> window will
appear. (See Fig. 13.12)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 129


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.12 Add/Modify Static MultiCast

Input the MAC address to be added in the <MAC Address> field. Input the flow id in the
<Flow ID> field.
Select the port in the <Available Ports> panel, and click the => button to add it to the
<Selected Ports> panel. Select the port in the <Selected Ports> panel, and click the <=
button to remove it from the <Selected Ports> panel.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <OK> to close this window and return to the <Group Broadcast Config> window.
Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

13.5 RPR Topology Information


To view the RPR station status, right-click an RPR card and select <RPR Topology
Information> (See Fig. 13.13). The <RPR TopoTable> window will appear.

130 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.13 RPR Topo Table

The window is divided to two panels.


In the first panel, select the RPR station you want to view in the <RPR Station> drop-down
menu.
In the second panel, you can view the properties of this RPR station:
<ringindex>: The label identified this station.
<West/East Mac>: MAC address for this RPR Node.

Click <Close>to quit this window without saving any modifications.


Click <Help>to launch the online help.

13.6 RPR Service Configuration


Select <RPR>Æ<RPR Service Configuration> to launch the <RPR Service Configuration>
window. (See Fig. 13.14)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 131


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.14 RPR Service Configuration

There are two panels in the window: <Basic Information> and <Add Station>.

13.6.1 Basic Information


In the Basic Information panel has the following parameters:
− <Ring Label>: Select one of the current rings in the dropdown menu.
− <Service Label>: Input a number to identify this service.
− <Service Class>: Includes three levels. The priority follows the order: <A>, <B>, <C>.
− <Service ID>: Input the flow id of this RPR service. Maximum 511 service flows are
allowed in each NE
− <Service Mode>: Includes two modes- <P2P> and <MP2MP>.
− <Wrap Protection>: Available values are <enable> and <disable>. If the protection mode
of ring is steering, the attribute can be ignored, which means service will always be
protected according to steering protection. If the protection mode of ring is wrapping,
when the value is “Disabled”, the service will not be protected; when the value is
“Enabled”, the service will be protected according to wrap mode.
− <Ringlet>: Indicates which ring supports this service. For multi-point to multi-point
service, ringlet should be same.For point to point service, ringlet from node A to Z and
ringlet from node Z to A can be selected separately. And it is not common attributes for
point to point service.

13.6.2 Add Station


After you configure the basic information, click <Configuration> to add a new station to this
service. The <Add RPR Service> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.15)

132 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.15 Add RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. Select stations and click <Add>. Then the <RPR
Service Station Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.16)

Fig. 13.16 RPR Service Station Configuration

Set the following attributes:


− <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port. Multiple client ports in one station can be selected (if
selected, they will belong to same broadcast domain no matter what customer VLAN ID
is).
− <Servie Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and
<Port+VLAN+Prio Based>. Different station’s service type in one service can be different.
− <Client VID>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN based” or
“Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client VID may not be same in different stations which
are belonged to the service.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 133


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

− <Client Priority>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN+Priority
based”. The Client Priority may not be same in different stations which are belonged to
the service.
− <Ringlet>: The ringlet which carries the service.
− <Maximum Bandwidth>: Indicate how much bandwidth this service can occupy. Click the
"..." button to enter detail setting. The Rate Limit List Pre-Configuration window will be
shown. (See Fig. 13.17)
− <Remote MAC>: A remote MAC address (only for p2p service mode).

Note:
i
a) If a port has been added into a service and the service type is port-based, then any
“port+vlan” or “port+vlan+priority” based service (in which the port has been added into
a service) can NOT be provided, and there is a prompt information.
b) If a port has been used by a service (the service type is “port+vlan”-based), then any
“port” based service (in which the port has been used by a service) can NOT be
provided, and there is a prompt information.

Fig. 13.17 Rate Limit Pre-Configuration

The <Rate Limit List> table shows the current Rate Limit setting. You can modify current rate
limit setting or add new one in the <Add or Modify Rate Limit> panel.
i Note: For each RPR card (station), only 8 levels supported. And for same service flow, all
rate of different client ports in different RPR stations should be same, and the rate must has
been pre-defined in all RPR stations, if some RPR stations have not define the rate, system
will prompt operator to define it in advance.
− To Add a Rate Limit:
1. Select one Rate Limit Index from 1 to 8 and input corresponding limited rate which unit
is kb/s. Those numbers which are already occupied cannot be used.
2. Click <OK> to add a new rate limit item.
Note: Every station can have 8 rate limit levels.

134 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

− To Modify a Rate Limit:


1. Select the rate limit index and input new limited rate.
2. Click <OK> and confirm this modify.
Note: Make sure that the rate limit to be modified is not in use.
Click <OK> to confirm your modify and quit this window.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to enter online help.
After you configure the <Add RPR Service> window, the information of the added station will
be shown in the <Add Station> panel in the <RPR Service Configuration> window.

To delete stations in the <Add RPR Service> window, select the stations you want to delete
in the <Selected Stations> panel, and then click <Delete>.
Click <OK> to confirm your setting and close this window.
Click <Close> to close this window without save any configuration.
Click <Help> to enter online help.

13.7 RPR Service Management


To manage RPR service, select <RPR>Æ<RPR Service Management> from the main menu
to launch the <RPR Service Management> window. (See Fig. 13.18)

Fig. 13.18 RPR Service Management

In the <RPR Service Management> window, select the corresponding attributes in the
<Query Attribute> panel. Then click <Query>. The RPR services with those attributes will be
listed in the <RPR Service List> table. (See Fig. 13.19)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 135


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.19 RPR Service Management- Query reslut

To delete a service, select one item in the <RPR Service List> table and click <Delete>.

i Note: If a service has been impacted or interrupted, the corresponding row in the list will be
marked with a yellow background

13.7.1 Service Detail


To view more information about this service or modify this service setting, select one item in
the <RPR Service List> table, and click <Detail>. The <Service Detail> window will appear.
(See Fig. 13.20)

136 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 13.20 Service Detail

The Service Detail window is divided to two panels: <Basic Information> and <Add Station>.
In the <Basic Information> panel, the following parameters can be set:
− <Ring Label>: Select one of the current rings in the dropdown menu.
− <Service Label>: Input a number to identify this service.
− <Service Class>: Includes three levels with priorities in order: <A>, <B>, <C>.
− <Service ID>: Input the flow id of this RPR service. Maximum 511 service flows are
allowed in each NE.
− <Service Bandwidth>: Indicates how much bandwidth this service can occupy. For class
A service, the maximum bandwidth can’t exceed the current available bandwidth in
reserved partition.
− <Service Mode>: Includes two modes- <P2P> and <MP2MP>.
− <Wrap Eligible >: Available values are <enable> and <disable>. If the protection mode of
ring is steering, the attribute can be ignored, which means service will always be
protected according to steering protection. If the protection mode of ring is wrapping,
when the value is “Disable”, the service will not be protected; when the value is “Enable”,
the service will be protected according to wrap mode.
− <TTL0>: Indicate this service’s living time of Ring0.
− <TTL1>: Indicate this service’s living time of Ring1.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Configuration> to modify the RPR service.
Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 137


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

13.7.2 Modify RPR Service


After you configure the basic information in the <Service Detail> window, click
<Configuration> to modify this service. The <Modify RPR Service> window will appear. (See
Fig. 13.21)

Fig. 13.21 Modify RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. You can select stations and click <Add>. Then
the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.22)

Fig. 13.22 RPR Service Station Configuration

Set the following attributes:


− <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port
− <Service Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and
<Port+VLAN+Prio Based>.
− <Client VID>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN based” or

138 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

“Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client VID may not be same in different stations which
are belonged to the service.
− <Client Priority>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN+Priority
based”. The Client Priority may not be same in different stations which are belonged to
the service.
− <Maximum Bandwidth>: Indicates how much bandwidth this service can occupy. Click
the "..." button to enter a detailed setting. The <Rate Limit List Pre-Configuration>
window will appear. (See Fig. 13.17 and related descriptions)

Note: If in one RPR station, all 8 rates have been used, and if operator wants to change a
i service flow rate, system will prompt operator that all available 8 rates have been used. And
if operator wants to continue operation, he must delete a pre-defined rate.

To delete stations in the <Modify RPR Service> window, select the stations to be deleted in
the <Selected Stations> panel, and then click <Delete>.
Click <OK> to confirm your setting and close this window.
Click <Close> to close this window without save any configuration.
Click <Help> to enter online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 139


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

14 Protection Management
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT supports CC 1+1, SNCP, MSP, and MSSPRING
management.

14.1 CC 1+1 Protection


Open the chassis view of an NE, in this configuration it will have 2 CC cards. From the main
menu, select <Configuration>Æ<CC(Card) 1+1 Protection>. The <CC 1+1 Protection>
window will appear. (See Fig. 14.1)

Fig. 14.1 CC 1+1 Protection

The status of the two CC cards, CC1 and CC2, are displayed in the upper panel.

Note: The <Latch State> indicates the status of the latches on the CC card. If the operator
i unlatches the card to pull it out from the shelf, the <Latch State> will become <Latch Open>
and working card will be switched to the other CC card. Meanwhile, the words “Latch Open”
will appear beside the bottom of the card in chassis view. If the operator latches the card to
pull it onto the shelf, the <Latch State> will become <Latch Close> and the card start work.
Meanwhile, the words “Latch Close” will appear beside the bottom of the card in chassis
view.

Note: Make sure the CC cards are in “Latch Close” state before plugging out anyone of them.
i
In the <Switch Request> drop-down menu, select the corresponding command including:
<Clear>, <Force switch to CC1>, <Force switch to CC2>, <Manual switch to CC1> and
<Manual switch to CC2>.
Click <Apply> to execute the switch request.
Click <Refresh> to view the latest information.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

140 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

14.2 Equipment Protection


TNMS-M SURPASS hit 7060 LCT provides 1+1 equipment protection for E3/DS3 application
and electrical STM-1board. 1+1 Protection is to enhance the system reliability. It consists of
one protection resource for taking the role of the working resource of the same type in case
of fault conditions or Element Management System (EMS) requests. Equipment protection is
made at a card basis. It’s used against the card removal and the card failure. In other words,
there must be two same function cards available on NE at the same time.
Meantime, Equipment Protection provides 1:N protection for E1 application, which consists
of one protection card and N working cards.

Note: In the normal state, the protection card can also provide traffic service of lower priority.
i When the protection switching is initiated, the lower-priority service will be dropped.

14.2.1 1+1 Equipment Protection


To open the corresponding Equipment Protection Management window, select
<Configuration>→<1+1 Equipment Protection Management> or <1:N Equipment Protection
Management >from the main menu. A new <Equipment Protection Group Management>
(EPG) window will appear. (See Fig. 14.2)

Fig. 14.2 Equipment Protection Group Management

Click <Refresh> to see current EPG status. All existed EPG will be listed in the window.
Select one EPG and Click <Command> to enter the <EPG External Command> window.
(See Fig. 14.3)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 141


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.3 EPG External Command

In the <EPG Properties> panel, all current properties about this EPG will appear. In the
<External Command> panel, select the external command in the external command
dropdown menu.
All external commands are listed as below:
<clear>: this command clears all of the externally initiated switch commands and WTR at the
node to which the command is addressed.
<lockout of Protection>(LP): prevents the selector from switching to the protection 63xE1.
<force switch to protection>(FS-P): switches the selector from the working slot (x) 63xE1 to
the protection 63xE1.
<force switch to working>(slot (x) 63xE1 FS-Wx): switches the selector from the protection
63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1. The FS-Wx command is unique only in 1+1 non-
revertive systems, since the LP command would produce the same effect on a revertive
system.
<manual switch to protection>(MS-P): switches the selector from the working 63xE1 (x) to
the protection 63xE1.
<manual switch to working>(slot (x) MS-Wx)>: switches the selector from the protection
63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1 The MS-W command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive
systems, since the clear command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.
The priority of those external commands is down in order.
Click <Refresh> to view current status.
Click <Apply> to confirm your change.

In the <EPG Management> window, select one EPG and click <Detail> to see the detail
information of the EPG properties. (See Fig. 14.4)

142 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.4 See detail of EPG

Click <Refresh> to get the latest version of EPG.


Click <Enable> to enable the EPG.
Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

To delete this EPG, select it in the <EPG Management> window and select <Delete>. In the
later pop up window, confirm the deleting action.

To add a new EPG, click <Create> button in the <EPG Management> window. The <Create
EPG> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.5)

Fig. 14.5 Create EPG

After inputting or selecting parameters in corresponding blanks, click <Create> to create this
EPG.
Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 143


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Help> to launch the online help.

14.2.2 1:N Equipment Protection


TNMS-M SURPASS hit 7060 LCT provides 1:N equipment protection for 63 E1 application ,
which consists of one protection card and N working cards.

Note: hiT7060 R3.4 only supports 63E1 retiming card.


i

To open the corresponding Equipment Protection Management window, select


<Configuration>→ <1:N Equipment Protection Management >from the main menu. A new
<1:N Equipment Protection Group Management> (EPG) window will appear. (See Fig. 14.6)

Fig. 14.6 1:N Equipment Protection Group Management

Click <Refresh> to see current EPG status. All existed EPG will be listed in the window.
Select one EPG and Click <Command> to enter the <EPG External Command>
window.(See Fig. 14.7)

144 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.7 1:N EPG External Command

In the <EPG Properties> panel, all current properties about this EPG will appear. In the
<External Command> panel, select the external command in the external command
dropdown menu.
All external commands are listed as below:
<clear>: this command clears all of the externally initiated switch commands and WTR at the
node to which the command is addressed.
<lockout of Protection>(LP): prevents the selector from switching to the protection 63xE1.
<force switch to protection>(FS-P): switches the selector from the working slot (x) 63xE1 to
the protection 63xE1.
<force switch to working>(slot (x) 63xE1 FS-Wx): switches the selector from the protection
63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1. The FS-Wx command is unique only in 1+1 non-
revertive systems, since the LP command would produce the same effect on a revertive
system.
<manual switch to protection>(MS-P): switches the selector from the working 63xE1 (x) to
the protection 63xE1.
<manual switch to working>(slot (x) MS-Wx)>: switches the selector from the protection
63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1 The MS-W command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive
systems, since the clear command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.
The priority of those external commands is down in order.
Click <Refresh> to view current status.
Click <Apply> to confirm your change.

In the <1:N Equipment Protection Management > window, select one EPG and click
<Modify> to Modify the detail information of the EPG properties.(See Fig. 14.8)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 145


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.8 See detail of 1:N EPG

Click <Refresh> to get the latest version of EPG.


Click <Apply> to confirm your change.
Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

To delete this EPG, select it in the <1:N Equipment Protection Management > window and
select <Delete>. In the later pop up window, confirm the deleting action.

To add a new EPG, click <Create> button in the <1:N Equipment Protection Management >
window. The <Create EPG> window will appear.(See Fig. 14.9)

Fig. 14.9 Creat 1:N EPG


After inputting or selecting parameters in corresponding blanks, click <Create> to create this
EPG.
Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

14.3 SNCP Management


To open the <SNCP Management> window, select <Configuration>Æ<SNCP Management>
in the main menu.
The <SNCP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.10)

146 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.10 SNCP Management

14.3.1 Viewing and Modifying SNCP


The <Conditions> section in the <SNCP Management> window allows setting the conditions
of querying to searching SNCP database. The querying conditions include Label, Card, Port,
Capacity, and Direction. Type in the Label of the SNCP to be searched; for the other
parameters (Capacity, Card, Direction, and Port), use the drop-down menu provided to set
parameters. Click <Query> to start searching the database. The results will appear as shown
in the table below.
The SNCPs and their properties will appear in the table.
Double-click an SNCP or select one SNCP then click <View/Modify> to view and modify it.
(See Fig. 14.11)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 147


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.11 View/Modify SNCP

The SNCP Properties supported are listed in Tab. 14.1 below.


Items Description
Capacity The transmission capacity. It cannot be modified in the
View/Modify window
Direction The transmission direction. It cannot be modified in the
View/Modify window.
Restore Mode The restore mode of this protection plan which includes Revertive
and No Revertive.
Wait To Restore Time The time interval waited for restore. This number must be
between 60 and 720. It cannot be modified in the View/Modify
window.
Label A label chosen by the user to help the user remember SNCPs
conveniently
Hold off Time The time to hold off. This time must be between 0 and 100.
Tab. 14.1 SNCP Properties

<Source/Destination TP> denotes the SNCP source/destination TP..


Select the current working TP, including its working card, port, and TP. This cannot be
modified in the <View/Modify> window.
<Protection TP> – Select the protection TP, including its protecting card, port, and TP. This
cannot be modified in <View/Modify> window.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.

148 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

14.3.2 Creating SNCP


In the <SNCP Management> window, click <Create> to create a new SNCP. (See Fig. 14.12)

Fig. 14.12 Create SNCP

14.3.3 Deleting SNCP


In the <SNCP Management> window click <Delete> to delete the selected SNCP.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 149


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.13 Delete SNCP

14.3.4 Switching SNCP

Click <Switch> in the <SNCP Management> window to switch SNCP. The <SNCP Switch>
window will appear (See Fig. 14.14)

Fig. 14.14 SNCP Switch

Select a command in the <Command List>: Clear, LockOut, Force Switch to Protection,
Force Switch to Working, Manual Switch to Protection, and Manual Switch to Working.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Apply> to start switch.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.

14.4 MSP Management


To open the <MSP Management> window:
From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<MSP Management>.
The <MSP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.15)

150 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.15 MSP Management

Input conditions in the text boxes, including: <Group Id>, and <Label>. Select options in the
drop-down menus, including: <Switch Direction>, <Operation Mode>, and <Card>.

Click <Query> to query the MSP protection.


Click <Create> to create linear Multiplex Section Protection Group.
Click <Delete> to delete an existed linear Multiplex Section Protection Group.
Click <View/Modify> to view or modify MSP property. (See Fig. 14.16)
Click <Switch> to switch working MS with Protection MS.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 151


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.16 MSP Property

The <MSP Property> window includes the following properties: <Protection Group ID>,
<Protection Group Label>, <Working Card>, <Working Port>, <Protection Card>, <Protection
Port>, <Protection Type>, <Switch Direction>, <Operation Mode>, and <Wait to Restore>.

In the <MSP Management> window, select one MSP, and click <Switch> to start the
operation. The <Swich> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.17)

Fig. 14.17 External Commands

The <Local MSP Status> section includes: <Active Path>, <Working MS>, <Protection MS>,
<The Current Request>, and <Switch Reason>.

152 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <Commands> drop-down menu, select one command and click <Apply> to operate
this command. This window will not be closed.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <OK> to operate this command and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

In the <MSP Management> window, click <Create> to create a new protection. The <Create
Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.18)

Fig. 14.18 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group

Input <Protection Group Label> and <Wait to Restore> in the corresponding fields and select
other options in the drop-down menus.
Click <OK> to create MS Protection and close the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

In the <MSP Management> window,


Click <Delete> to delete the selected protection.
Click <Print> to print the information of the selected protection.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

14.5 MSSPRing Management


LCT provides the function of creating and viewing MSSPRing information.
To open the <MSSPRing Management> window:
From the main menu, click <Configuration>Æ<MSSPRing Management>. The <MSSPRing
Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.19)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 153


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.19 MSSPRing Management

Click <Query> to get the current MSSPRing information. Exsisting MSSPRings will be listed
in the table, with the following parameters: <Ring ID>, <Ring Name>, <Ring Type>,
<Protection>, and <Number of NEs>.
Click <Print> to print the information of the MSSPRing.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

14.5.1 Creating MSSPRing


Before the user creates a new MSSPRING, he must know the ring topology and link
information about this NE.
Follow the steps below to create a new ring with MSSRPing Protection:
In the < MSSPRing Management> window, click <Create>. The <Create Ring> window will
appear. (See Fig. 14.20)

Fig. 14.20 Set Ring Property

Input a number as <Ring Id>, a number as <NE Number in the Ring>, and arbitrary string as
<Ring Label>. The ring type can be set as <STM4> or <STM16>. Click <OK> to set the NEs
in the ring.
i Note: The maximum number of the ring is 16, and the Ring ID should be a number between
1 and 5000. If the information is incorrect or some items are not inputted, a warning window
will appear. (See Fig. 14.21)

154 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.21 Warning Window

A new window will appear. A serial of numbered NEs will appear on the window, the total
number of which equals the number that the user input in the previous window. (See Fig.
14.22)

Fig. 14.22 Create MSSPRing and Link Configuration

Click the icon of each NE following the sequence of their serial number. Input NE’s IP
address and click <OK>. (See Fig. 14.23) This NE will be added in ring.
Note: The NE managed in current LCT software must be added; otherwise the next step will
i not be available.

Fig. 14.23 Set NEs in Ring

Click each of the links to set up the Link Port properties in the pop-up dialog. Choose the link
port, input slot number and port number of peer link port in the pop-up dialog.(See Fig.14.24)
The color of the corresponding link will turn green.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 155


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.24 Create Ring-Select Link

When all the NEs and links are configured, click <OK>, and a confirmation dialog will pop up.
(See Fig. 14.25)

Fig. 14.25 Create MSSPRing Confirming

Click <Yes> to confirm to add protection to the ring and return to the Ring Management
window. Now the ring just created will appear in the <Ring list> field. (See Fig. 14.26)

156 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.26 Create MSSPRing Created

14.5.2 Delete a Ring


To delete an existing ring, select it in the <Ring List> table and click <Delete>.

i The deletion operation only deletes the ring entity in the SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT database.
If transmission protection has been added on that ring, the protection information on every
ring node will not be erased. The ring entity can be uploaded from the network again as
described previously.

14.5.3 Ring Property


To see the ring properties, click <Property> in the <MSSPRing Management> window and
the ring properties window will appear.
There are four tabs in this window:
Protection Details Tab (See Fig. 14.27)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 157


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.27 Ring Properties- Protection Details

In the <Protection Details> tab, there are two groups: <Protection Property> and
<Configuration>.
The <Protection Property> table lists all the NEs included by this MS-SPRING and the status
of corresponding ports.
- <Node ID>: The ID of included NE.
- <NE Address>: The IP address of NE.
- <East Port>: The east card and port which are connected in the ring.
- <West Port>: The west card and port which are connected in the ring.
- <Status>: The current status of the MSSPRing.
- <Enable>: <Enable> or <Disable>.
- <Suspend>: <Suspend> or <Unsuspend>.
In the <Configuration> group, you can modify <Ring Name> and set <WTR> (Wait To
Restore Time), and select <NUT> ports. (Note that the NUT configuration just can be
changed while MSSPRING is disabled.)
Check <Auto Mapping> to map TP structure of peer NE. Note that if <Auto Mapping> is
checked, then the buttons in the <Mapping> tab will be greyed out.
Check <Auto Squelch> to enable auto-squelch. Note that if <Auto Squelch> is checked, then
the buttons in the <Squelch> tab will be greyed out.
Click <Delete Protection> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to delete protection from the
MSSPRing. All the other buttons and tabs will be greyed out, and this button will become
<Add Protection>. Click the button to re-add protection onto the MSSPRing.
Click <Enable MS-SPRing> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to change the MSSPRing
Enable status to “Enable”. Then the button will become Disable MS-SPRing. Click the button
to change the MSSPRing Enable status to “Disable”.

158 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Suspend MS-SPRing> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to suspend the
MSSPRing. Then the button will become Unsuspend MS-SPRRing. Click the button to un-
suspend the MSSPRing.

Switch Tab (See Fig. 14.28)

Fig. 14.28 Ring Properties- Switch

Click the Switch tab to view switch information and perform switch commands.
There are two sub-tabs, <East Side> and <West Side>. They are responsible for execution
of east and west external command respectively.
After select side, click command in <Command> dropdown menu.
<Clear>: Clears the externally initiated command and WTR at the node to which the
command was addressed. The NE-to-NE signaling following removal of the externally
initiated commands is performed using the NR code.
<LockOut Protection>: Prevents the ring wraps anywhere for any protection activity and
prevents using ring switches anywhere in the ring. If any ring switches exist in the ring, this
command causes the switches to drop. If there is a span switch for this span, it is dropped.
Thus, all ring switching is prevented (and pre-empted), and span switching is prevented only
on the locked-out span.
<Forced Switching Ring>: Performs the ring switch for normal traffic from the working
channels to the protection channels for the span between the node at which the command is
initiated and the adjacent node to which the command is destined. This switch occurs
regardless of the state of the protection channels, unless the protection channels are
satisfying a higher priority bridge request.
<Manual Switching Ring>: Performs the ring switch for the normal traffic from the working
channels to the protection channels for the span between the node at which the command is
initiated and the adjacent node to which the command is destined. This switch occurs if the
protection channels are not in an SD condition and are not satisfying an equal or higher
priority bridge request (including failure of the protection channels).
<Exercise>: Command switch test
Click <Apply> to perform this command.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 159


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the sub-tab, the corresponding status information will be listed.


<Current Command>: The highest priority command under performing.
<Line Request>: The request message coming from link.
<Last Switch Reason>: Reason of last switch action.

Mapping Tab (See Fig. 14.29)

Fig. 14.29 Ring Properties- Mapping

Click the Mapping tab to view Auto Mapping Configuration.


Select NE from the drop-down menu and click <Query> to query Auto Mapping Configuration.
In below window, the TP structure of peer NE port used by MS-SPRING is shown. You can
change the mapping manner via right click selected TP.

Squelch Tab (See Fig. 14.30)

160 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 14.30 Ring Properties- Squelch

Click <Query> to get latest information.


Click <Create> to add a new squelched cross connection.
Click <Property> to view and Modify the squelched cross connection.
Click <Delete> to delete selected squelched cross connection.
Click <Close> to quit this dialog.
Click <Help> to launch online help.
.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 161


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15 DCN Management

15.1 Change NE IP
There are two ways to change NE IP address of an existing node:
Select <DCN>Æ<Change NE IP>,
Right click NE and select <Change NE IP> in the pop-up menu.
A new window will appear. (See Fig. 15.1)

Fig. 15.1 Change NE IP

Input the new IP Address of the NE.


Click <OK> to confirm the modifications, or select <Cancel> to quit this window.
Note: NE’s node IP address is used as the label of node in MSSPRing ring, if there is
MSSPRing ring configured in NE, user must set MSSPRing status as idle and delete the
MSSPRing on the NE first before changing the Node IP address, then can create the
MSSPRing on the NE once again.

15.2 Change Ethernet IP


Use one of the following two methods to change the Ethernet IP address of an existing node:
Select <DCN>Æ<Change Ethernet IP>,
Right click the MGMT port and select <Change Ethernet IP> in the popup menu.
Then the <Configure Ethernet IP> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.2)

Fig. 15.2 Configure Ethernet IP

Input the new IP information of the NE, including <New IP address>, <New Subnet Mask>
and <New Gateway>.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications, or select <Cancel> to quit this window.

162 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15.3 DCC Management


In the <Port DCC Management> window, user can query current the DCC status of every
STM port.
To open the <Port DCC Management> window, select <DCN>→<DCC Management> from
the main menu.
The <Port DCC Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.3)

Fig. 15.3 Port DCC Management

In the list, every row corresponds to one STM port with following properties:
<Card>: Specifies the corresponding card name and slot.
<Port>: Port type.
<Port Number>: The number of the corresponding port.
<MS/RS DCC Mode>: Specifies the current DCC mode. Click this unit to change its value to
either <ENABLE> or <DISABLE>.
< MS/RS DCC Protocol>: Specifies the current DCC protocol. Click this unit to change its
value ro <HDLC>, <OSI> , <PPP> or <GRE Tunnel>.
<MS/RS DCC link status>: Specifies the current link status.

Click <Query> to view the latest information.


Click <Apply> to make the modification in use.
Click <OK> to make the modification in use and close the window.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Click <Print> to print all information in this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 163


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15.4 OSI Configuration


In the chassis view select one SDH port. From the main menu, select <DCN>→<OSI
Configuration>. The <OSI Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.4)

Fig. 15.4 OSI Configuration

Select <User> or <Network> in the <Network Side> drop-down menu based on the current
NE’s position.
Select <Acknowledged> or <Unconfirmed > in the <LAPD AITS> drop-down menu.
Input the corresponding values in other fields. The meanings of those parameters are listed
below.
<T200(ms)>: The retransmission timer. (measured in milliseconds)
<T203(s)>: The maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged. (measured in
seconds)
<N200(times)>: The maximum number of frame repetitions.
< LAPD AITS>: < Acknowledged > or < Unconfirmed >.
<Window>: The window size in AITS mode. Possible values are 1 – 127
<Config Timer(s)>: The timer interval. (measured in seconds)
<TTL>: The time to live for a CLNP PDU.
<Local NSAP>: The local NSAP address.
<Remote NSAP>: The destination NSAP address.
<Destination IP>: The destination IP address
<MTU >: The maximum length of the frame.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time OSI properties.


Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

164 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Choose one SDH port in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the OSI properities of the selected
port. (See Fig. 15.5)

Fig. 15.5 Edit OSI properities


Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Cancel> to close the window without saving the modifications.

15.5 GRE Tunnel Configuration


In the chassis view select one SDH port. From the main menu, select <DCN>→<GRE
Tunnel>. The <GRE Tunnel> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.6)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 165


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.6 GRE Tunnel Configuration

Select <User> or <Network> in the <Network Side> drop-down menu based on the current
NE’s position.
Select <Acknowledged> or <Unconfirmed > in the <LAPD AITS> drop-down menu.
Select <False> or <True > in the <Bypass> drop-down menu
Input the corresponding values in other fields. The meanings of those parameters are listed
below.
<T200(ms)>: The retransmission timer. (measured in milliseconds)
<T203(s)>: The maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged. (measured in
seconds)
<N200(times)>: The maximum number of frame repetitions.
< LAPD AITS>: < Acknowledged > or < Unconfirmed >.
<Window>: The window size in AITS mode. Possible values are 1 – 127
<Destination IP >: The destination IP address.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time GRE tunnel properties.


Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.
Choose one SDH port in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the GRE tunnel properities of the
selected port. (See Fig. 15.7)

166 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.7 Edit GRE Tunnel

Note: If Bypass mode is selected, the DCC mode of the current port and destination port
i must be of the same type. (Both are MS mode or RS mode). HDLC, PPP and OSI are
available under this mode.

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.


Click <Cancel> to close the window without saving the modifications.

15.6 MGMT Port RIP Configuration

In the chassis view select one SDH port. From the main menu, select <DCN>→<MGMT Port
RIP Configuration>. The <MGMT Port RIP Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.8)

Fig. 15.8 MGMT Port RIP Configuration

Click <Query> to check the current settings.


Select <Enabled> or <Disabled>, and click <Apply> and <Close> to confirm the
modifications and close the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 167


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15.7 IP Route Configuration

15.7.1 IP Interface
Select <DCN>Æ<IP Route Configuration>Æ<IP Interface> and the <IP Interface> window
will appear. (See Fig. 15.9)
The IP Interface parameters about the NE will be list in the <IP Interface> table. These
parameters are listed below.

Fig. 15.9 IP Interface

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<Interface Index>: A unique number (greater than zero) that identifies each interface for
TNMS-MP identification of that interface.
<Description>: a brief description of the IP Interface
<Type>: the type of the IP Interface
<MTU >: the maximum length of the frame
<Speed>: the speed of the IP Interface
<Physical Address>: the physical address of the IP Interface
<Administrative Status>: the IP interface’s administrative status. The value formed on the
interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area.
<Operation Status>: the IP interface’s operation status.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.


Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

168 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

15.7.2 IP Static Route


Select <DCN>Æ<IP Route Configuration>Æ<IP Static Route> and the <IP Static Route>
window will appear. (See Fig. 15.10)
The IP static routes parameters for the NE will be list in the <IP Static Routes> table. These
parameters are explained below.

Fig. 15.10 IP Static Route

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<Destination>: the destination IP address
<Mask>: IP mask of the IP static routes
<Protocol>: the protocol of the IP static routes
<Interface Index>: A unique number (greater than zero) that identifies each interface for
TNMS-MP identification of that interface.
<NextHop>: the NextHop of the IP static routes
<Admin Status>: the administrative status of the IP static routes. The value formed on the
interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area.
<Operation Status>: the operation status of the IP static routes.
<Metric Type>: the metric type of the IP static routes
<Cost>: the cost of the IP static routes
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Choose an IP static route in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the selected IP static route.
(See Fig. 15.11)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 169


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.11 Edit IP Static Route

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.


Click <Cancel> to close the window without saving the modifications.

Click <Add> in the <IP Static Route> window to add a new IP static route.

Fig. 15.12 Add IP Static Route

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.


Click <Cancel> to close the window without saving the modifications.

15.7.3 IP Routing Table


Select <DCN>Æ<IP Route Configuration>Æ<IP Routing Table> and the <IP Routing Table>
window will appear. (See Fig. 15.13)
The IP routing table parameters about the NE will be list in the <IP Routing Table>. These
parameters are explained below.

170 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.13 IP Routing Table

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<Destination>: the destination IP routing table.
<Mask>: IP mask of the IP routing table
<Protocol>: the protocol of the IP routing table
<Interface Index>: A unique number (greater than zero) that identifies each interface for
TNMS-MP identification of that interface.
<NextHop>: the NextHop of the IP routing table
<Type>: the type of the IP routing table
<Age>: the age of the link state advertisement in seconds.
<Metric>: the metrics of the IP routing table
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.8 OSPF
The OSPF submenu provides an entrance to manage and query parameters about OSPF.
(See Fig. 15.14)
Note: Before configuring the parameters about OSPF, the “PPP” protocol for that DCC port
i must be selected firstly.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 171


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.14 OSPF Submenu

15.8.1 OSPF General


Select <DCN>Æ<OSPF>Æ<OSPF General> from the main menu. The <OSPF General>
window will appear. (See Fig. 15.15) In this window the user can find some basic OSPF
information about the NE.
The OSPF general parameters about the NE will be list in the <OSPF General Info> field. All
parameters are list in the <OSPF General> field respectively.

Fig. 15.15 OSPF General

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<Router ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System.
<Administrative Status>: The administrative status of OSPF in the router. The value
<enabled> denotes that the OSPF Process is active on at least one interface; <disabled>
disables it on all interfaces.

172 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<Version Number>: The current version number of the OSPF protocol is 2.


<Area Border Router>: A flag to note whether this router is an area border router.
<AS Border Router>: A flag to note whether this router is configured as an Autonomous
System border router.
<Extern LSA Count>: The number of external link-state advertisements in the linkstate
database.
<Extern LSA Cksum Sum>: The 32-bit unsigned sum of the LS checksums of the external
link-state advertisements contained in the link-state database. This sum can be used to
determine if there has been a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the
link-state database of two routers.
<TOS Support>: the router's support for type-of-service routing.
<Originate New LSAs>: The number of new link-state advertisements that have been
originated. This number is incremented each time the router originates a new LSA.
<Received New LSAs >: The number of link-state advertisements received which are
determined to be new instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of
self-originated link-state advertisements.
<External LSDB Limit>: The maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSA entries that
can be stored in the link-state database. If the value is -1, then there is no limit.
<Multicast Extensions>: A Bit Mask indicating whether the router is forwarding IP multicast
(Class D) datagrams based on the algorithms defined in the Multicast Extensions to OSPF.
If set to Bit 0, this indicates that the router can forward IP multicast datagrams in the router's
directly attached areas (called intra-area multicast routing). If set to Bit 1, this indicates that
the router can forward IP multicast datagrams between OSPF areas (called inter-area
multicast routing). If set to Bit 2, this indicates that the router can forward IP multicast
datagrams between Autonomous Systems (called inter-AS multicast routing).
<Exit Overflow Interval>: The number of seconds that a router will attempt to leave
OverflowState, after entering OverflowState. This allows the router to re-originate non-default
AS-external-LSAs. When set to 0, the router will not leave OverflowState until restarted.
<Exit Overflow Interval> will not be supported.
<Demand Extensions>: The router's support for demand routing
Click <Edit> to change <Router ID>, <Administrative Status>, <Area Border Router>, and
<External LSDB Limit>.
Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Cancel> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.8.2 OSPF Areas


The OSPF Areas data contains information regarding the various areas. The interfaces and
virtual links are configured as part of these areas.
Select <DCN>Æ<OSPF>Æ<OSPF Areas> and the <OSPF Area> window will appear. (See
Fig. 15.16)
The OSPF Areas parameters for the NE will be list in the <OSPF Areas> table.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 173


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.16 OSPF Area

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<Area ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the
OSPF backbone
<Authentication Type>: The authentication type specified for an area. Additional
authentication types may be assigned locally on a per Area basis.
<Import AS External>: The area's support for importing AS external link-state advertisements.
The available values have importExternal (1). importNoExternal (2) and importNssa (3)
<SPF Runs>: The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using
this area's link-state database.
<Area Border Router Count>: the total number of area border routers reachable within this
area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.
<AS Border Router Count>: the total number of Autonomous System border routers
reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.
<Area LSA Count>: the total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-state
database, excluding AS External LSA's.
<Area LSA Checksum Sum>: the 32-bit unsigned sum of the link-state advertisements’ LS
checksums contained in this area's link-state database. This sum excludes external (LS type
5) link-state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change
in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
<Area Summary>: controls the import of summary LSAs into stub areas. It has no effect on
other areas. If it is <noAreaSummary>, the router will neither originate nor propagate
summary LSAs into the stub area. It will rely entirely on its default route. If it is
<sendAreaSummary>, the router will both summarize and propagate summary LSAs.
Click <Add> to create a new OSPF area on this NE. Input <Area ID> and select value of
<Auth Type>, <Import AS External> and <Area Summary> in the drop-down menus. Other
parameters’ value is set automatically. (See Fig. 15.17)

174 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.17 Add OSPF Area

Click <Apply> to add this OSPF area.


Click <Cancel> to give up adding this area.

In the <OSPF Area> window, click <Edit> to configure the OSPF areas on the NE provided
that there are one or more OSPF Area records in current window. (See Fig. 15.18)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 175


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.18 Edit OSPF Area

Click <Apply> to confirm the changes to this OSPF area.


Click <Cancel> to give up editing this area.

In the <OSPF Area> window:


Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Delete> to delete the selected area.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.8.3 OSPF Interfaces


The <OSPF Interface> window augments the ipAddrTable with OSPF specific information
and describes the interfaces from the viewpoint of OSPF.
Select <DCN>Æ<OSPF>Æ<OSPF Interfaces> and the <OSPF Interfaces> window will
appear. (See Fig. 15.19)
The OSPF Interface parameters for the NE will be listed in the <OSPF Interfaces> table.

176 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 15.19 OSPF Interface

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<IP Address>: The IP address of this OSPF interface.
<Addressless Interface>: To ease the instancing of addressed and addressless interfaces;
this variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and the corresponding value
of ifIndex for interfaces having no IP Address.
<Name>: interface name for reference (slot/port)
<Area ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the area to which the interface connects.
Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone.
<Type>: The OSPF interface type. The available values are <Broadcase(1)>, <NBMA(2)>,
<Point To Point(3)>, <Point To Multipoint(5)>, and <Loopback(10)>. Broadcast LANs, such
as Ethernet and IEEE 802.5, take the value <broadcast>, while X.25 and similar
technologies take the value <NBMA(2)>. Links that are definitively point to point take the
value <Point To Point(3)>.
<Administrative Status>: The OSPF interface’s administrative status. The value formed on
the interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area. The
value <disabled> denotes that the interface is external to the OSPF.
<Router Priority>: The priority of this interface. This is used in multi-access networks.
<Transit Delay>: The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update
packet over this interface.
<Retransmission Interval>: The number of seconds between link-state advertisement
retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.
<Hello Interval>: The length of time, in seconds, between the Hello packets that the router
sends on the interface.
<Router Dead Interval>: The number of seconds that a router’s Hello packets have not been
seen before its neighbors declare the router down.
<Poll Interval>: The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent to an
inactive nonbroadcast multi- access neighbor.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 177


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<State>: The OSPF Interface State.


<Designated Router>: The IP Address of the Designated Router
<Backup Designated Router>: the IP Address of the Backup Designated Router.
<Events>: The number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state or an error has
occurred.
<Status>: Displays the status of the entry. Setting it to <invalid> has the effect of rendering it
inoperative.
<Authentication Key>: The Authentication Key
<Multicast Forwarding>: The way multicasts should forwarded on this interface
<Demand>: Indicates whether Demand OSPF procedures (hello suppression to FULL
neighbors and setting the DoNotAge flag on proogated LSAs) should be performed on this
interface.
<Authentication Type>: The authentication type specified for an interface.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.


Click <Edit> to change the attributes.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.8.4 OSPF Interface Metrics


OSPF Interface Metrics describes the metrics to be advertised for a specified interface on
the various types of service.
Select <DCN>Æ<OSPF>Æ<OSPF IF Metrics> from the main menu. The <OSPF Interface
Metric> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.20)
The OSPF Interface Metric parameters for the NE will be list in the <OSPF Interfaces> table.

Fig. 15.20 OSPF Interface Metric

178 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<IP Address>: The IP address of this OSPF interface.
<Addressless Interface>: For the purpose of easing the instancing of addressed and
addressless interfaces; this variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and
the value of ifIndex for interfaces having no IP Address.
<Type of Service>: The type of service metric being referenced.
<Value>: the metric of using this type of service on this interface. The default value of the
TOS 0 Metric is 108.

In the <OSPF Interface Metrics> window:


Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.8.5 OSPF Neighbors


The OSPF Neighbors describe all neighbors local to the subject router.
Select <DCN>Æ<OSPF>Æ<OSPF Neighors> and <OSPF Neighor> window will pop up.
(See Fig. 15.21)
The OSPF neighbors of the NE will be list in the <OSPF Neighbors> table.

Fig. 15.21 OSPF Neighbor

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:


<IP Address>: The IP address this neighbor is using in its IP Source Address.
<AddressLess Interface>: On an interface having an IP Address, the value is zero. On
addressless interfaces, the value is the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet
Standard MIB.
<Router ID>: A 32-bit integer (represented as a type IP Address) uniquely identifying the
neighboring router in the Autonomous System.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 179


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<Options>: A Bit Mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field. The available values
are 0, 1, 2, and 3. Bit 0 indicates that the system will operate on Type of Service metrics
other than TOS 0. Bit 1 indicates that the associated area accepts and operates on external
information. Bit 2 indicates that the system is capable of routing IP Multicast datagrams; i.e.,
that it implements the Multicast Extensions to OSPF. Bit 3 indicates that the associated area
is an NSSA.
Bit 3 indicates that the associated area is an NSSA.
<Priority>: The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm. The value
0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular
network.
<State>: The State of the relationship with this Neighbor.
<Events >: The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has
occurred.
<Length of Retransmission Queue>: The current length of the retransmission queue.
<NBMA Neighbour Performance>: displays the status of the entry.
<Hello Suppressed>: Indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbour.
Click <Refresh> to view the latest neighbor information.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

15.9 Route Redistribution


To share the routing information between RIP and OSPF protocol, open the <Route
Redistribution> window first.
Follow the steps below to open the window.
Select the DCNÆRoute Redistribution from the main menu.
The <Route Redistribution> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.22)

Fig. 15.22 Route Redistribution

The user can select <Enabled> in the <RIP to OSPF> field to re-distribute RIP to OSPF, or
select <Enabled> in the <OSFP to RIP> field to re-distribute OSFP to RIP.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest route re-distribution information.


Click <Apply> to apply the modification without closing the window.
Click <OK> to apply the modification and close this window.
Click <Close> to close this window without saving.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

180 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

16 Maintenance

16.1 PRBS Test Management


PRBS (pseudo-random binary sequence) is used to measure the bit-error performance of
digital systems by directly comparing of a received pseudo-random test pattern with a locally
generated test pattern identical to the transmitted test pattern.
From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<PRBS Test Management> to launch the
<PRBS Test Management> window. (See Fig. 16.1)

Fig. 16.1 PRBS Test Management

16.1.1 Query Current PRBS Status of Ports


To view the current PRBS setting for the ports, select the corresponding <Card> and <PRBS
Status> information in the drop-down menus. The ports satisfying those conditions will be
listed in the table. Click <Refresh> to query latest data. (See Fig. 16.1)

<Pattern>: The test patterns complied with the definition in ITU-T Recommendation O.151.
(See Tab. 16.1 )

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 181


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Bit Recommendations Recommendations


Bit rate Test
rates corresponding to corresponding to digital line
tolerance Pattern
(kbit/s) multiplex system section/line system
215 – 1,
1544 G.733 G.911, G.951, G.955 ± 50 · 10–6
220 – 1
2048 G.732 G.921, G.952, G.956 ± 50 · 10–6 215 – 1
34368 G.751 G.921, G.954, G.956 ± 20 · 10–6 223 – 1
215 – 1,
44736 G.752 G.914, G.953, G.955 ± 20 · 10–6
220 – 1
139264 G.751 G.921, G.954, G.956 ± 15 · 10–6 223 – 1
Tab. 16.1 PRBS Test Pattern

<Status>: Status shows whether PRBS test is successful or has failed.


<Error Blocks>: Shows how many errors are in the payload. Bit-error ratios in the range of
10–3 to 10–8 should be measured.

16.1.2 Set PRBS Testing


Select the corresponding NE and card in the drop-down menu to specify which port to
operate PRBS testing on. All ports of this card will be listed in the table.
For the desired port, either double click or highlight and click the Setting button to open the
PRBS Test Configure window. (See Fig. 16.2)

Fig. 16.2 PRBS Setting

Change port in the <Port> drop-down menu and set PRBS test status with <PRBS Disabled>
or <PRBS Enabled> in the <Status> field.
Click <Apply> to confirm setting.
Click <Refresh> to view latest status of this port.

16.1.3 Enable or Disable PRBS Test


To configure the desired port in the PRBS Test, follow the steps below to open the
Enable/Disable PRBS Test window:
1. Select Maintenance→PRBS Test Management from the main menu.
2. Select card and PRBS status in the corresponding drop-down menus in the Criteria
section. The ports satisfying those conditions will be listed in the table.
3. Either double-click a line listed in the table or highlight a line and click the Setting button.
The Enable/Disable PRBS Test window will be shown. Change port in the Port drop-down
menu and set PRBS test status with PRBS Disabled or PRBS Enabled in the Status field.
The user can also change the PRBS mode in the PRBS mode drop-down menu. There are
two available values: Invert, or Normal.

182 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Refresh> to query the latest data.


Click <Apply> to confirm the settings.

16.2 Loop-back Test Management


From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<Loopback Test Management> to launch the
<Loopback Test Mangement> window. (See Fig. 16.3)

Fig. 16.3 Loopback Test

16.2.1 Querying Loopback Status


To view the loopback status of a port, select the corresponding <NE>, <Card>, and
<Loopback Type> desired in the drop-down menu. Click <Query> and all ports that satisfy
the conditions will be listed in the table.

16.2.2 Setting Loopback Test


Loopback maintenance is supported on any PDH/SDH port, ATM port (LAN/WAN), and
transparent Ethernet LAN port. It is used to locate the malfunction point in the network when
service is interrupted..
There are two loopback types: <In Loopback> and <Out Loopback>. Out Loopback is far-
end loopback, while In Loopback is near-end loopback. When service is interrupted, if Out
Loopback is pass-through, it means that the NE works well, there is something wrong with
other NEs in the network.
Select the corresponding NE, card, and port in drop-down menu to specify which ports to
operate loopback testing on. All ports that satisfy the conditions will be listed in the table.
For the desired port, either double-click or highlight and click <Setting> to open the
<Loopback Test Configure> window. (See Fig. 16.4)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 183


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 16.4 Lookback Test Configure


Choose <Loopback Type>: either <In LoopBack> or <Out LoopBack>.
Click <Begin> to start testing. The <LoopBack Status> line will show the current status.
Click <Stop> to end the test.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

16.3 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management


From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management> to
launch the <AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management> window. (See Fig. 16.5)

184 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 16.5 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management

Note: AIS means Alarm Indication Signal in Multiplex Sections, RDI means Remote Defect
i Indictor in Multiplex Sections.
Select <NE>, <Card>, <Port> and <Test Status>, and click <Query>. All TPs satisfying those
terms will appear. To set AIS/RDI conditions about one TP, select that item in the list, and
click <Setting>, or double click the list item. The configuration window will pop up. There are
two types of AIS/RDI Insertion Set based on the two types of TPs(such as VC4 and VC12).
(See Fig. 16.6 and Fig. 16.7)

Fig. 16.6 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 1

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 185


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 16.7 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 2

Click <OK> to confirm the setting and quit this dialog.

16.4 LED Test


LED test is used to check if the LEDs of an NE are working correctly.
From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<LED Test> to launch the <LED Test>
window. (See Fig. 16.8)

Fig. 16.8 LED Test

Click <Test LED>. If the LEDs of this NE work correctly, the LEDs will flash for a few
moments then go to their normal state.

186 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17 Performance Monitoring Management

17.1 Overview of Performance Monitoring

17.1.1 SDH Performance Monitoring

17.1.1.1 PM in Regeneration Section (G.829)


Definitions
Block: For STM-N (N=1, 4, 16, 64), the N× BIP-8 contained in the B1 bytes pertains to N
blocks. Thus, the signal structure of an RS in an STM-N comprises N blocks within a frame.
Errored Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits are in error.
Errored Second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one
defect.
Severely Errored Second (SES): A one-second period which contains >=X% errored blocks
or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES.
Constant Severely Errored Second (CSES): Period with consecutive SES.
Background Block Error (BBE): An errored block not occurring as part of an SES.
Unavailable Second (UAS): Ten consecutive SES seconds will cause the UAS to increase.
Ten consecutive error free seconds will stop the UAS from increasing.
Out of Frame Second (OFS): A one-second period with one or more wrong frames.
UnAvailable Period (UAP): Timestamps indicating the beginning and end of an Unavailable
Period. A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten consecutive SES events.
These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of available
time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. UAP is independent from 15m
or 24h UAS. Even if the UAS was manually reset, UAP should retain its value.

Note: There is no mechanism for collecting far-end performance data for the RS layer.
i
Anomalies
An error on the whole block is indicated by the EDC (Error Detection Code).

Defects
LOS: Loss of signal
LOF: Loss of frame
RS TIM: Trace identify mismatch in SDH Regeneration Section

Estimation of the performance events


ES: one anomaly or one defect in a second
SES:≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect a second, Y = blocks per second *xx%
BBE: anomalies but not in SES

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 187


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Rate STM-0 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16


EBs 800 2,400 2,400 2,400
xx% (EBs) 10% 30% 30% 30%
Tab. 17.1 Regenerator Section SES threshold xx% (for BIP-8)

17.1.1.2 PM in Multiplex Section (G.829)


Definitions
MS: The N×24 BIP-1s contained in the B2 bytes of an SDH MS in an STM-N (N=1, 4, 16, 64)
pertains to N×24 in different blocks. Thus, the signal structure of a generic MS comprises
N×24 blocks within a frame.
MS Far End Errored Blocks: Number of error blocks indicated by REI in the STM-N frame.
For Errored Block (EB), Errored Second (ES), Severely Errored Second (SES), Constant
Severely Errored Second (CSES), Background block error (BBE), Unavailable second (UAS),
UnAvailable Period (UAP) - refer to the definition for RS. (ITU-T G.829)

Note: For STM-16, MS Far End Errored Blocks Size is defined as follow:
i STM-N Block Size Blocks per Blocks per EDC
(bits) frame seconds
STM-16 801 384 3,072,000 384xBIP-1
(but maximum 255xBIP-1 can be
detected and reported)
Tab. 17.2 MS Far End Errored Blocks Size- STM-16

Anomalies
An Errored Block happens as indicated by an EDC.

Defects
Near end defects of Trail termination Applicable Path
MS AIS Multiplex Sections

Tab. 17.3 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second

Near end defects of Path termination Applicable Path

MS RDI Multiplex Sections

Tab. 17.4 Defects resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second

Note: MS AIS means Alarm Indication Signal in Multiplex Sections. MS RDI means Remote
i Defect Indictor in Multiplex Sections.

Estimation of the performance events


ES: one anomaly or one defect in a second.
SES: ≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect a second, Y= (number of blocks per second ×
xx%).
BBE: anomalies but not in SES.

188 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Rate STM-0 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 STM-64


EBs 9,600 28,800 192,000 921,600 3,686,400
Xx% (EBs) 15% 15% 25% 30% 30%
Tab. 17.5 Multiplex Section SES threshold xx% (For BIP-1)

17.1.1.3 PM for HP/LP (High Order and Low Order Paths) (G.829)
Definitions
HP: The BIP-8 contained in the B3 byte of an SDH HP pertains to one block. Thus, the
signal structure of a generic HP comprises 1 block within a frame. LP VC3s are the same.
HP Far End: The count contained in the G1 byte of an SDH HP pertains to one block. Thus,
the signal structure of a generic HP (far end) comprises 1 block within a frame. LP VC3s are
the same.
LP: The BIP-2 contained in the V5 byte of an SDH LP pertains to one block. Therefore, the
signal structure of a generic LP comprises 1 block within a multi-frame.
LP Far End: The FEBE bit contained in the V5 byte of an SDH LP pertains to one block.
Therefore, the signal structure of a generic LP (far end) comprises 1 block within a multi-
frame.
For Errored block (EB), Errored Second (ES), Severely Errored Second (SES), Constant
Severely Errored Second (CSES), Background block error (BBE), Unavailable second (UAS),
UnAvailable Period (UAP) - refer to the definition for RS. (ITU-T G.829)

Anomalies
An EB happens as indicated by an EDC.

Defects
Near end defects of Trail termination Applicable Path
LP UNEQ (Note 2) Lower Order Path
LP TIM
TU LOP
TU AIS
TU LOM
LP PLM
HP UNEQ (Note 2) Higher Order Path
HP TIM
AU LOP
AU AIS
HP PLM
Tab. 17.6 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second

Note 1: This defect is not related to VC-3.


i Note 2: Paths not actually completed, e.g. during path set-up, will contain the unequipped
VC-n signal.

Near end defects of Path termination Applicable Path


LP RDI Lower Order Path
HP RDI Higher Order Path
Tab. 17.7 Defects Resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 189


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Definitions and notes:


LP UNEQ: Lower order Path is UNEQuipped.
LP TIML: Trace identifies mismatch in Lower order Path.
TU LOP: Tributary Unit Loss Of Pointer.
TU AIS: Tributary Unit Alarm Indictor Signal.
LP TIM: Lower order Trace Identify Mismatch.
LP PLM: Lower order Path PayLoad Mismatch.
HP PLM: Higher order Path PayLoad Mismatch.
HP UNEQ: Higher order Path UNEQuipped.
HP TIM: Higher order Path Trace Identify Mismatch.
AU LOP: Administrative Unit Loss Of Pointer.
AU AIS: Administrative Unit Alarm Indicator Signal.
LP RDI: Lower order Path Remote Defect Indiaction.
HP RDI: Higher order Path Remote Defect Indiaction.

Estimation of the performance events


ES: one anomaly or one defect.
SES: ≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect in a second, Y=blocks per second × xx%.

Rate VC-11/12/2 VC-3 VC-4/4c/16c/64c


EBs 600 2,400 2,400
xx% (EBs) 30% 30% 30%
Tab. 17.8 Path Overhead Section SES Threshold xx% (For BIP-2, BIP-8)

17.1.1.4 PM for Pointer Justification Counts at Administrative Unit (G.707)

The AU pointer is contained in the H1, H2 and H3 bytes which are associated with, but not
part of, the SDH Multiplexing Section Overhead. The N bits (bits 1-4) of the pointer carry the
New Data Flag which allows an arbitrary change of the pointer value if that change is due to
a change in the payload. The last ten bits (bits 7-16) of the H1 and H2 bytes carry the pointer
value that designates the location of the byte where the VC-n begins. The H3 is the pointer
action byte. The AU pointer provides a method of allowing flexible and dynamic alignment of
the VC within the AU frame.
During normal operation, the NDF is disabled and set to "0110", and the pointer locates the
start of the VC-n within the AU-n frame. If there is a frequency offset between the frame rate
of the AUG and that of the VC-n, the pointer value will be incremented or decremented by
one as needed, accompanied by a corresponding positive or negative justification byte or
bytes. This operation is indicated by inverting five I-bits or D-bits of the pointer. The positive
justification bytes appear immediately after the last H3 byte in the AU-n frame and the
negative justification bytes appear in the H3 bytes in the AU-n frame.
If there is a change in the payload, NDF is enabled by inversion of the N-bits to "1001". The
new location of the VC-n begins at the first occurrence of the offset indicated by the new
pointer. For AU-4 concatenation, the AU-n pointer is set to Concatenation Indication, "1001"
in bits 1-4 and ten "1"s in bits 7-16.
Currently PPJC and NPJC can be monitored only at AU-4.
Definitions:
PPJC - Positive Pointer Justification Count.
NPJC - Negative Pointer Justification Count.

190 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Defects:
LOP - Loss of Pointer.

17.1.2 Data Performance Monitoring Parameters


The following parameters can be monitored in the LCT:
Received Total Bytes
Received Total Frames
Received Total Good Frames
Received Total Bad Frames
Received Unicast Frames
Received Multicast Frames
Received Broadcast Frames
Received Dropped Good Frames
Received Undersized Good Frames
Received Oversized Good Frames
Received 64 Byte Frames
Received 65-127 Byte Frames
Received 128-255 Byte Frames
Received 256-511 Byte Frames
Received 512-1023 Byte Frames
Received 1024-1518 Byte Frames
Received Pause Frames
Received Fragment Frames
Sent Total Bytes
Sent Total Frames
Sent Unicast Frames
Sent Multicast Frames
Sent Broadcast Frames
Sent Good Pause Packets

17.1.3 RPR Performance Monitoring


The following parameters can be monitored:
Received Data Frames
Received Control Frames
Received Fairness Frames
Transmitted All Frames
Transmitted Add Frames
Transmitted Topology Frames
Transmitted Fairness Frames
Transmitted OAM and ATD Frames
Received HEC Error Frames
Received Parity Error Frames
Received FCS Error Frames
Received Edge Error Frames
Received Local Source Address Error Frames

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 191


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Received Unicast Class A Frames


Received Unicast Class A Bytes
Received Unicast Class B Eir Frames
Received Unicast Class B Cir Bytes
Received Unicast Class C Frames
Received Unicast Class C Bytes
Received Multicast Class A Frames
Received Multicast Class A Bytes
Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames
Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes
Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames
Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes
Received Multicast Class C Frames
Received Multicast Class C Bytes
Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames
Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes
Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames
Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes
Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames
Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes
Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames
Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes
Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames
Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes
Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames
Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes
Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames
Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes
Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames
Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes

17.2 SDH Performance Monitoring


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<Current SDH Performance> to open the
<SDH Current Performance> window. This is the main window for the SDH Current
Performance. (See Fig. 17.1)

192 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.1 SDH Current Performance

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the following primary PM management functions
(see Tab. 17.9):

Functions Description
Unmonitor / Monitor / Option for configuring the performance monitoring and the
Monitor & Auto Report reports provided.
Dropdown
Set All Apply the modification from the dropdown to all records
Refresh Refresh the information.
Filter Used to filter and display the points to be examined. This
function is only for the display selection since there are too
many points to be displayed clearly.
Note: Point is defined as a specific TP, an example a point
could be defined as Node 182.16.1.1, Line Card 1, Port 3, or
MS-TTP.
Edit PM parameters for each TP can be edited.
Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will
not be displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited
point is filtered first.
Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table
Close Close the window.
Print Print or save the PM values.
Help Launch the online help.
Reset (Right-clicked Menu) Reset all parameters for every selected TPs in the table.
Edit Threshold (Right- Set alarm threshold for selected TPs.
clicked Menu)
Tab. 17.9 PM Management Functions

Note: In the list table, multi-selection and right-clicked menu are supported. If selecting
i <Unmonitor>, <Monitor>, or <Monitor & Auto Report> from the drop-down menu, and click
<Set All> button, the modification will be applied to all the records.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 193


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<UnMonitor> and <Monitor>: The performance monitoring for a TP can be suspended or


resumed separately. While the difference between <Monitor> and <Monitor&Auto Report> is
as follow: if <Monitor&Auto Report> is selected, the performance for this TP during this
Granularity(15 Minutes or 24 Hours)will be reported to NE automatically.

17.2.1 Filter Setting


In the <SDH Current Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter>
window, which is used to filter TPs and parameters. (See Fig. 17.2)

Fig. 17.2 Monitor Point Filter

17.2.1.1 TP Filter
The filter is used to select TPs that will appear in the <SDH Current Performance> window.
Click <Add> in the <Selected TPs> panel to add a new TP. (See Fig. 17.3)

194 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.3 Select Terminal Point

Select the point to be monitored by choosing the corresponding <NE>, <Card>, <Port>, and
<TP Type>. This is used to narrow the scope of TPs when searching for specified TPs. In
the <TP type> drop-down menu, the value range is: RS, MS, VC4, AU4, AU4-4c, AU4-16c,
VC12 and LOVC3.The desired points will be shown in the table below.
Select the desired TPs and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected TPs> frame of the
<Monitor Point Filter> window.
Click <Cancel> to withdraw selections and close this window.
In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing TP points and click <Remove> to
remove the selected TPs.

17.2.1.2 Parameter Filter


The parameter filter is used to decide the type of parameters that will appear in the < Monitor
Point Filter> window. A parameter can be fully expressed by a few items: <15-minutes> or
<24 hours>, <Near End> or <Far End>.
If no parameters in the <Monitor Point Filter> window are selected, no results will be
displayed in the main table of the <SDH Current Performance> window.

17.2.2 Editing Monitored Parameter


Select <Performance>Æ<Current SDH Performance>. Then click <Edit> in the <SDH
Current Performance> window.
The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitor> window is used to edit port, TP, and PM
parameters. (See Fig. 17.4)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 195


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.4 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter

There are four sections in this window: <Selected TPs>, <Granularity>, <Location> and
<Monitor Type>.
The <Selected TPs> section functions the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
The <Granularity> section indicates the performance monitoring granularity.
The <Location> section indicates the PM location.
The < Monitor Type > section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the
reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>,
and <Monitor & Auto Report>.

Note 1: If the user does not know the actual TP’s monitor status, <Monitor & Auto Report>
i should be selected..
Note 2: When the TP’s monitor status is set to <UnMonitor>, the alarm thresholding cannot
be set.

17.2.3 Edit Threshold


In <Current SDH Performance> window, select one or more TPs, in the right click menu, the
operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.5)

196 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.5 Current SDH Performance(Right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown.
(See Fig. 17.6)

Fig. 17.6 Threshold Setting

The Alarm Threshold of ES, BBE, SES, UAS can be configure in the window. If the current
value of the parameter crosses the value of the threshold, an alarm will be launched.

Note: If more than one PM are selected to edit their threshold, their TP types must be the
same, otherwise a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 17.7)

Fig. 17.7 Warning window

The value range and default value of 15-minute and 24-hour are listed in the following two
tables. (See Tab. 17.10 and Tab. 17.11)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 197


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

TCA Default Value Allowed Range


RS ES 114 1-900
RS SES 10 1-900
RS BBE 9000 1-65535
RS UAS 15 1-900
MS ES 114 1-900
MS SES 10 1-900
MS BBE 36000 1-65535
MS UAS 15 1-900
MS ES (Far End) 114 1-900
MS SES (Far End) 10 1-900
MS BBE (Far End) 36000 1-65535
MS UAS (Far End) 15 1-900
VC4-TTP ES 180 1-900
VC4-TTP SES 15 1-900
VC4-TTP BBE 36000 1-65535
VC4-TTP UAS 15 1-900
VC4-TTP ES (Far End) 180 1-900
VC4-TTP SES (Far 15 1-900
End)
VC4-TTP BBE (Far 36000 1-65535
End)
VC4-TTP UAS (Far 15 1-900
End)
AU4 PJCP 3600 1-65535
AU4 PJCN 3600 1-65535
Tab. 17.10 Default Value and Value Range for a Fixed 15-minute Period

TCA Default Value Allowed Range


RS ES 10,944 1~65535
RS SES 960 1~65535
RS BBE 48000 1~65535
RS UAS 20 1~65535
MS ES 10,944 1~65535
MS SES 960 1~65535
MS BBE 48000 1~65535
MS UAS 20 1~65535
MS ES (Far End) 10,944 1~65535
MS SES (Far End) 960 1~65535
MS BBE (Far End) 48000 1~65535
MS UAS(Far End) 20 1~65535
VC4-TTP ES 17,280 1~65535
VC4-TTP SES 1440 1~65535
VC4-TTP BBE 48000 1~65535
VC4-TTP UAS 20 1~65535
VC4-TTP ES (Far End) 17,280 1~65535
VC4-TTP SES (Far End) 1440 1~65535
VC4-TTP BBE (Far End) 48000 1~65535
VC4-TTP UAS (Far End) 20 1~65535
AU4 PJCP 35000 1~65535
AU4 PJCN 35000 1~65535

198 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Tab. 17.11 Default value and Value Range for a Fixed 24-hour Period

17.2.4 History SDH Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History SDH Performance>.
The <SDH History Performance> window is used to display the history value of one TP
parameter. (See Fig. 17.8)

Fig. 17.8 SDH History Performance

The <Filter> function is the same as that of the <SDH Current Performance> window. (Refer
to Chapter 17.2.1.)
The maximum records number of history performance in the LCT program is listed in the
following table:

Parameter Granularity Maximum Records number

UAP 15-Minutes or 24-hours 6

Other parameters 15-Minutes 32

Other parameters 24-hours 1

Tab. 17.12 Maximum Records number of History Performance

For example, at most 6 history UAPs for each TP can be recorded in the LCT program. For
other parameters, up to the last 8-hours for 15-Minutes performance and up to the previous
1-Day period for 24-hrs performance can be recorded in the LCT program.

Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.


Click <Print> to print the information of the selected Ethernet history performance.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 199


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.2.5 SDH Unavailiable Periods


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<SDH Unavailiable Periods> to open the
<SDH UnAvailable Periods> window. (SeeFig. 17.9)

Fig. 17.9 SDH Unavailiable Periods

Click <Change> to change selected TP in the <Selected TPs> field and the <Select Terminal
Point> window will appear. (SeeFig. 17.10)

Fig. 17.10 Select Terminal Point

200 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Filter to the desired TP using the dropdown menus, select terminal point from the table, click
<OK> to go back to the <SDH Unavailable Periods> window.
In the <Location> panel choose the selected TP to be monitored as either <Near End> or
<Far End>.
The value can be displayed by Curve Graph.
Click <Query> to check the latest PM information.
Click <Print> to print the PM report.
Click <Edit> to reset the monitoring setting. (SeeFig. 17.11)

Fig. 17.11 Edit Setting


Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

The maximum records number for each type of PM is configurable and can be up to 1016-1,
i.e. 999,999,999,999,999. This number is applicable, at the same time, to all seven history
Performance database tables (SDH, Ethernet, RPR Span, RPR Mac Client, E1 Bit Slip, and
SDH UAP), the default value of the number is 108-1, i.e. 99,999,999.

17.3 Ethernet Performance Monitoring Configuration


In the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT, the following primary Ethernet PM functions are
provided (see Tab. 17.13):
Functions Description
Unmonitor / Configure the performance monitoring and the reports type.
Monitor /
Monitor & Auto
Report
Dropdown
Set All Apply the modification from the dropdown to all records
Refresh Refresh the information.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 201


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Functions Description
Filter Used to filter and display the points to be examined. This function is
only for the display selection since there are too many points to be
displayed clearly.
Note: Point is defined as a specific LAN or WAN port. For example a
Point could be described as Node 182.16.1.1, UDC 1, and LAN port1.
Edit Ethernet PM parameters for each LAN or WAN port can be edited
Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will not be
displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited point is filtered first.
Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table
Print Print or save the Ethernet PM values.
Close Quit the window.
Help Launch the online help.
Reset (Right- Reset all parameters for selected TPs in the table
clicked Menu)
Tab. 17.13 Primary Ethernet PM Function

From the main menu, select <Performance>Æ<Current Ethernet Statistics> to open the
<Ethernet Current Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.12)

Fig. 17.12 Ethernet Current Statistics


Choose a suitable filter parameter from this screen: the user’s choice of 24 kinds of Data PM
Parameters. These 24 Data PM Parameters have been defined in Chapter 17.1.2.

i Note:
1. In the list table, multi-selection and right-clicked menu are supported, by right-clicked
menu, the operator can set monitor type of selected TPs.
2. Different Ethernet cards have different frame size. Therefore, the moitored parameters
may have differentia with the card’s type. The detail information about the frame size is listed
in the table below:

202 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

6FEL2 8FET/4FET 2GET 2xGE+8xFE/AE


Received number 64~1518 and
64~1536 64~MAX 64~
of unicast frames less than 64

Received number 64~1518 and


64~1536 64~MAX 64~
of multicast frames less than 64

Received number
64~1518 and
of broadcast 64~1536 64~MAX 64~
less than 64
frames
The total size The total size
Received number
of UC, MC, NA of UC, MC, NA
of good bytes
and BC and BC
The total size The total size
Received number
of UC, MC, 64~1518 of UC, MC, 64~1518
of good packets
and BC and BC
Received number
64~1536 and 64~1518 and 64~1536 and
of CRC erred 64~1518 and
FCS Error FCS Error FCS Error
frames FCS Error
more than more than more than
Received number more than 1518
1536 and FCS 1518 and FCS MAX and FCS
of oversize frames and FCS Valid
Valid Valid Valid
Received number
less than 64 less than 64 less than 64 less than 64 and
of undersize
and FCS Valid and FCS Valid and FCS Valid FCS Valid
frames
Tab. 17.14 Frame Size Ranges for Different Parameters

17.3.1 Filter Setting


The <Monitor Point Filter> window is launched by clicking <Filter> in the <Ethernet Current
Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.13)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 203


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.13 Monitor Point Filter

This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. Click <Add> to select the
port. (See Fig. 17.14)

Fig. 17.14 Select Port

204 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <Monitor Point Filter> window choose a suitable filter parameter from this screen to
filter ports: <15-minute> or <24-hour> and the monitor type.

17.3.2 Editing Monitored Parameter


The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitor> window can be launched by clicking <Edit> in
<Ethernet Current Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.15)

Fig. 17.15 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor

There are three frames in this window: <Selected Ports>, <Granularity>, and <Monitor Type>.
The <Selected Ports> panel is used to choose the LAN or WAN ports which to be monitored.
The <Granularity> panel allows the choice of a suitable filter parameter: <15 Minutes> or <24
Hours>.
The <Monitor Type> panel gives the user port monitor state options. There are three options
to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>, and <Monitor&Auto Report>. If the user does
not know the actual TP’s monitor status, all three monitor types should be selected.

17.3.3 5-Second Ethernet Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>Æ<5 Second Ethernet Performance> to open
the <5-Second Ethernet Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.16)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 205


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.16 5 Second Ethernet Statistics

There are two panels in the window:< Ethernet 5s PM Enabled Ports> and < Ethernet 5s PM
Data in Last 5 Minutes>.
Click <Enable> to select ports whose performance to be monitored. (See Fig. 17.17)

Fig. 17.17 Select Port

In the <Port Filter> panel, select the card and port type in the <Card> and <Port> drop-down
menus.
Available ports will be listed in the <Available Ports> table.

206 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Choose the ports to be enabled in the table, and then click <OK> to add them to the
<Enabled Ports> panel.
To remove ports from the <Ethernet 5s PM Enabled Ports> panel, highlight the ports to be
removed, and click the <Disable> button.
Note:
The maximum number of Ethernet 5s PM Enabled ports allow is 2.
Click the <Refresh> button, and the following parameters of Ethernet 5s performance can be
viewed in the Ethernet 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes table: <Card>, <Port> and <Start
Time>.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.3.4 History Ethernet Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History Ethernet Performance>. The
<Ethernet History Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.18)

Fig. 17.18 Ethernet History Statistics

The <Filter> function is the same as that of the <Ethernet Current Performance> window.
(Refer to Chapter 17.3)
The maximum records number of Ethernet history performance is the same as that of SDH
history performance. (Refer to Chapter 17.2.3)
Click <Refresh> to see the most recent settings.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Print> to print the Ethernet history information.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.4 Ethernet VLAN Performance Monitoring Configuration


In the main menu bar, select <Performance>→<Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> to open
the < Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.19)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 207


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.19 Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics

17.4.1 Enable Setting


The <Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM> window is launched by clicking <Enable> in the <
Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics > window. (See Fig. 17.20)

Fig. 17.20 Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM

17.4.1.1 Port and VLAN Filter


The filter is used to select Port and VLAN that will appear in the < Current Ethernet VLAN
Statistics > window. Click <Add> in the < Selected Ports> panel to add a new Port. (See Fig.
17.21 )

208 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.21 Select Port and VLAN


Select the port to be monitored by choosing the corresponding items and click <OK> to add
them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the < Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM > window.
Click <Cancel> to withdraw selections and close this window.
In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing ports and click <Remove> to remove the
selected Ports.

17.4.2 History Ethernet VLAN Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History Ethernet VLAN Statistic>. The
<Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.22)

Fig. 17.22 Ethernet VLAN Statistics

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 209


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.4.2.1 Filter Setting


The <Monitor Point Filter> window is launched by clicking <Filter> in the < Ethernet VLAN
Statistics > window. (See Fig. 17.23)

Fig. 17.23 Monitor Point Filter

This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. Click <Add> to select the
port. (See Fig. 17.24 )

Fig. 17.24 Select Port and VLAN

Select the port to be monitored by choosing the corresponding items.Select the desired
Ports and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the <Monitor Point
Filter> window.
Click <Cancel> to withdraw selections and close this window.

210 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing Ports and click <Remove> to remove
the selected Ports.

17.4.3 5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>Æ<5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance> to
open the <5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.25)

Fig. 17.25 5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance

Click <Enable> to select ports whose performance to be monitored. (See Fig. 17.26)

Fig. 17.26 Select Port and VLAN

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 211


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the <Port and VLAN Filter> panel, select the card, port type and port number in the
<Card>, <LAN/WAN> and <Port> drop-down menus.
Available ports will be listed in the <Available Ports> table.
Choose the ports to be enabled in the table, and then click <OK> to add them to the
<Enabled Ports> panel.
To remove ports from the <Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Enabled Ports> panel, highlight the ports
to be removed, and click the <Disable> button.
Click the <Refresh> button, and the following parameters of Ethernet VLAN 5s performance
can be viewed in the Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes table: <Card>, <Port>,
<VLAN ID> and <Start Time>.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.5 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance >→ <Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> to open
the <Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance> window. (See Fig17.27)

Fig. 17.27 Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance

Note: In the list table, multi-selection and right-clicked menu are supported.

17.5.1 Filter Setting


Click <Filter> to launch the <Monitor Point Filter> window. (See Fig. 17.28)

212 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.28 Monitor Point Filter

This filter function is the same as the SDH Performance filter function.
The <Ports Selected> section is used to choose the E1 ports which need to be monitored.
Click <Add> to filter ports and add them to the list. (See Fig. 17.29)

Fig. 17.29 Select Port

After selecting the corresponding attributes and click <Refresh>, the available ports will be
listed. Select ports needed and click <OK>. This action adds these ports in the <Ports
Selected> table. (See Fig. 17.30)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 213


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.30 Selected Ports

Click <OK> to see those ports’ corresponding thresholds status and values.

17.5.2 Editing Monitored Parameter


In the <Current E1Bit-Slip Performance> window, select the corresponding port and click
<Edit>. This will enter the <Edit Properties of Performance Monitor> window.

Fig. 17.31 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor

214 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

There are three sections in this window: < Selected Port(s)>, <Granularity> and <Monitor
Type>.
The function of the < Selected Port(s)> section is the same as that in the <Monitor Point
Filter> window.
The <Granularity> section indicates the performance monitoring granularity.
The <Monitor Type> section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the
reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>,
and <Monitor&Auto Report>. Only one option can be selected.
<UnMonitor> and <Monitor>: The performance monitoring for a TP can be suspended or
resumed separately. While the difference between <Monitor> and <Monitor&Auto Report> is
as follow: if <Monitor&Auto Report> is selected, the performance for this TP during this
Granularity(15 Minutes or 24 Hours)will be reported to NE automatically.

17.5.3 Edit Threshold


In <Current E1Bit Slip Performance> window, select one or more TPs, in the right click menu,
the operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.32)

Fig. 17.32 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance(Right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown.
(See Fig. 17.33)

Fig. 17.33 Threshold Setting

Two thresholds categories are available to be configured: <Positive Bit-Slip Alarm


Threshold> and < Negative Bit-Slip Alarm Threshold>.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 215


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Note: If more than one PM are selected to edit their threshold, their TP types must be the
same, otherwise a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 17.34)

Fig. 17.34 Warning window

17.5.4 History E1 Bit Slip Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History E1 Bit Slip Performance>. The
<History E1 Bit Slip Performance> window will be shown. (See Fig. 17.35)

Fig. 17.35 History E1 Bit Slip Performance


The function of <Filter> is the same as that of the <Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> window.
(Refer to Chapter 17.5.1.)
The maximum records number of E1 Bit Slip history performance is the same as that of SDH
history performance. (Refer to Chapter 17.2.3)
Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.
Click <Print> to print the information of the selected Ethernet history performance.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.6 PDH CRC Performance Monitoring


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<Current PDH CRC Performance> to open
the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window. This is the main window for the PDH CRC
Current Performance. (See Fig. 17.36)

216 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.36 PDH CRC Current Performance

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the following primary PM management functions
(See Tab. 17.15):

Functions Description
Unmonitor / Monitor / Monitor
Option for configuring the performance monitoring and the
& Auto Report Dropdown reports provided.
Set All Apply the modification from the dropdown to all records
Refresh Refresh the information.
Filter Used to filter and display the points to be examined. This
function is only for the display selection since there are too
many points to be displayed clearly.
Note: Point is defined as a specific TP, an example a point
could be defined as Node 182.16.1.1, Line Card 1, Port 3, or
MS-TTP.
Edit PM parameters for each TP can be edited.
Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will not
be displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited point is
filtered first.
Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table
Print Print or save the PM values.
Close Close the window.
Help Launch the online help.
Reset (Right-clicked Menu) Reset parameters for a selected TP in the table
Tab. 17.15 PM Management Functions

17.6.1 Filter Setting


In the < Current PDH CRC Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point
Filter> window, which is used to filter Ports and/or parameters. (See Fig. 17.37)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 217


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.37 Monitor Point Filter

17.6.1.1 Port Filter


The filter is used to select Ports that will appear in the < Current PDH CRC Performance>
window. Click <Add> in the <Selected Ports> panel to add a new Port. (See Fig. 17.38)

Fig. 17.38 Select Port

218 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Select the point to be monitored by choosing the corresponding <NE> and <Card>.Select
the desired Ports and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the <Monitor
Point Filter> window.
Click <Cancel> to withdraw selections and close this window.
In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing Ports and click <Remove> to remove
the selected Ports.

17.6.1.2 Parameter Filter


The parameter filter is used to decide the type of parameters that will appear in the < Current
PDH CRC Performance > window. A parameter can be fully expressed by a few items: 15-
minutes or 24 hours, Near End or Far End, and one or more of the following parameters: ES,
BBE, SES, CSES, UAS.
If no parameters in the <Parameter> frame of the <Monitor Point Filter> window are selected,
no results will be displayed in the main table of the < Current PDH CRC Performance>
window.

17.6.2 Editing Monitored Parameter


Select <Performance>Æ< Current PDH CRC Performance >. Then click <Edit> in the <
Current PDH CRC Performance > window.
The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit port and PM
parameters. (See Fig. 17.39)

Fig. 17.39 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 219


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

There are five sections in this window: <Selected Ports>, <Granularity>, <Location>
<Threshold Setting> and <Monitor Type>.
The <Selected Ports> section functions the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter>
window.
The <Granularity> section indicates the performance monitoring granularity.
The <Location> section indicates the PM location.
The < Monitor Type > section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the
reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMontor>, <Monitor>,
and <Monitor&Auto Report>.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

17.6.3 Edit Threshold


In <Current SDH Performance> window, select one or more TPs, in the right click menu, the
operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.40)

Fig. 17.40 Current PDH CRC Performance(Right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown.
(See Fig. 17.41)

Fig. 17.41 Threshold Setting

220 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

The Alarm Threshold of ES, BBE, SES, UAS can be configure in the window. If the current
value of the parameter crosses the value of the threshold, an alarm will be launched.

Note: If more than one PM are selected to edit their threshold, their TP types must be the
same, otherwise a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 17.42)

Fig. 17.42 Warning window

17.6.4 History PDH CRC Performance


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History PDH CRC Performance>.
The < History PDH CRC Performance> window is used to display the history value of one
Port parameter. (See Fig. 17.43)

Fig. 17.43 History PDH CRC Performance

Click <Filter> to launch the <Monitor Point Filter> window. (See Fig. 17.44)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 221


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.44 Monitor Point Filter


This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. The < Selected Ports>
section is used to choose the ports which need to be monitored.
Click <Add> to filter ports and add them to the list. (See Fig. 17.45)

Fig. 17.45 Select Port


Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.
Click <Print> to print the information of the selected Ethernet history performance.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

222 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.6.5 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods


From the main menu, select <Performance>→<PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods> to open the
<PDH CRC UnAvailable Periods> window. (See Fig. 17.46)

Fig. 17.46 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods


Click <Change> to change selected Ports in the <Selected Ports> field and the <Select
Port> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.47)

Fig. 17.47 Select Port

Filter to the desired card using the dropdown menus, select Port from the table, click <OK>
to go back to the <PDH CRC Unavailable Periods> window.
In the <Location> panel choose the selected Ports to be monitored as either <Near End> or
<Far End>.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 223


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

The value can be displayed by Curve Graph.


Click <Query> to check the latest PM information.
Click <Print> to print the PM report.
Click <Edit> to reset the monitoring setting. (See Fig. 17.48)

Fig. 17.48 Edit Setting

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.


Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

17.7 RPR Span Performance Monitoring Configuration


In the main menu bar, select <Performancec>→<Current RPR Span Performance> to open
the <Current RPR Span Performance > window. (See Fig. 17.49)

224 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.49 RPR Span Current PM

Note: In this table, multi-selection and right-clicked menu are supported, by right-clicked
menu, the operator can set monitor type of selected TPs.

17.7.1 Filter
In the <Current RPR Span Performance > window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point
Filter> window, which is used to filter Spans and/or parameters. (See Fig. 17.50)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 225


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.50 Monitor Point Filter

In the <Spans Selected> frame click <Add> to open the <Select Span> window. (See Fig.
17.51)

Fig. 17.51 Select Span

Select the spans to be monitored by choosing the corresponding NE and card name. The
available ports will be listed in panel below. Select the spans you want to monitor and click
<OK>. The selected spans will then appear in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
To remove on of these spans, select it and click the <Remove> button.

226 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Parameter Filter
A parameter can be fully expressed by two parts:
<Granularity>: Can be set to either <15-minutes> or <24 hours>. This is the time span for
which the system will collect one set of statistics.

Note: To different parameters, the corresponding frame size ranges are not same. The detail
i information is listed in the following table:
Received number of unicast frames UC Frame (64~MTU)

Received number of multicast frames MC Frame (64~MTU)

Received number of broadcast frames BC Frame (64~MTU)

Received number of good packets Good frames >=64 good

Received number of CRC erred frames >=64 and FCS Error

Received number of oversize frames more than 1518 and FCS Valid

Received number of undersize frames less than 64 and FCS Valid


Tab. 17.16 Frame Size Range for Parameters

Click <Save> to save the setting.


Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit the window.
Click <Cancel> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

17.7.2 Edit Monitored Parameter


Click <Edit> in < RPR Span Current Performance> window. The <Edit Properties of
Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit the span and PM parameter. (See Fig.
17.52)

Fig. 17.52 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 227


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

It is divided into three parts: <Spans Selected>, <Granularity> and <Monitor Type>.
Corresponding functions are the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
Click <Apply> to confirm your modification.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.7.3 RPR Span History Value


To launch the <History RPR Span Performance> window:
In the main menu, select <Performance>→ <History RPR Span Performance>.
The <RPR Span History Performance> window is used to display the history value of the
monitored Span parameters. (See Fig. 17.53)

Fig. 17.53 RPR Span History Performance Value

Click <Refresh> to see the most recent settings.


Click <Close> to close the window
Click <Print> to print the Performance report.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.
Click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window.(See Fig. 17.54)

228 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.54 Select Parameter

In the <Granularity> frame choose between <15 Minutes> and <24 Hours>.

In the <Spans Selected> frame click <Add> to open the <Select Span> window. (See Fig.
17.55)

Fig. 17.55 Select SPAN

Select the spans to be monitored by choosing the corresponding NE and card name. The
available ports will be listed in panel below. Select the spans you want to monitor and click
<OK>. The selected spans will then appear in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
To remove on of these spans, select it and click the <Remove> button.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 229


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.8 RPR MAC Client Performance Monitoring Configuration


In the main menu bar, select <Performance>→<Current RPR MAC Client Performance> to
open the <Current RPR MAC Client Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.56)

Fig. 17.56 Current RPR MAC Client Performance

Note: In this table, multi-selection and right-clicked menu are supported, by right-clicked
menu, the operator can set monitor type of selected TPs.

17.8.1 Filter
In the < Current RPR MAC Client Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the Monitor
Point Filter window, which is used to filter Clients and/or parameters. (See Fig. 17.57)

230 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.57 Monitor Point Filter

Client Filter
To add Clients to the <Clients Selected> panel in the <Monitored Point Filter> window click
the <Add> button. The <Select Client> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.58)

Fig. 17.58 Select Client

Select any card to be monitored as client and click <OK>. The selection will be added to the
<Selected Clients > panel of the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
Select one of these added clients in the <Selected Clients > panel and click <Remove> to
remove it.

Parameter Filter
<Granularity>: Choose either <15-minutes> or <24 hours>. The time span for which the
system will collect one set of statistics.
If none of the checkboxes are selected in the <Parameters> panel, nothing will be displayed
in the <Performance Monitored Point> window.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 231


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

17.8.2 Edit Monitored Parameter


Highlight a row and click <Edit> in < RPR MAC Client Current Performance> window. The
<Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit the highlighted span and
PM parameter. (See Fig. 17.59)

Fig. 17.59 Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring

It is divided into three parts: <Selected Client(s) >, <Granularity> and <Monitor Type>.
Corresponding functions are the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.
Click <Apply> to confirm your modification.
Click <Close> to close this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

17.8.3 RPR MAC Client History Value


To launch the RPR MAC Client History window:
In the main menu, select <Performance >→<History RPR MAC Client Performance>.
The <RPR MAC Client History Performance> is used to display the history value of one
parameter for a Client. (See Fig. 17.60)

232 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 17.60 RPR MAC Client History Performance Value

Click <Refresh> to check the latest performance information.


Click <Print> to print the performance report.
Click <Close> to quit this window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.
Click <Filter> to set up the Monitor Point Filter. (See Fig. 17.61)

Fig. 17.61 Select Parameter

The function of the <Clients Selected> frame is to select a client for viewing. Click <Add> to
add a new client. (See Fig. 17.62) Select an existing client and click <Remove> to remove it.

Fig. 17.62 Select Client

Select the NE and Card from the drop-down menus. You can select any card as client, which
you want to monitor, and click <OK>.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 233


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the Monitor Point Filter window, set the <Granularity> for RPR MAC Client.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications.
Click <Cancel> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

234 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

18 Alarm and Event Management

18.1 Overview of Alarms


There are five alarm severity level values defined:
• Critical—Service-interrupting alarms.
• Major—Service-affecting alarms.
• Minor—Non-Service-affecting alarms that could potentially become service-affecting.
The user needs to inspect the system faults and provide fixes in order to prevent the
alarm from deteriorating to Major.
• Warning—Non-Service-affecting alarms. Information is presented to the user for the
purpose of maintenance.
• All—All the above four alarm severity levels.

There are five types of failures in the system:


• Transmission Failure—Failures related to transmission status, such as LOS, LOF, LOP,
and LOM.
• Quality of Service Failure—Failure related to system performance, such as response
time being too long, threshold crossing, and performance degradation.
• Equipment Failure—Failures related to hardware equipment.
• Processing Error Failure—Failures related to software or the fault processing, such as
memory overflow, version incompatibility, software errors, program illegal interruption,
NE configuration errors or an inaccessible NE, as well as AIS, TIM, REI, RDI, PLM, and
UNEQ.
• Environmental Failure—Failures related to environment changes, such as unacceptable
temperature and humidity, ventilation or cooling system faults, excessive vibration, or an
open door in the equipment room.

18.2 NE Alarms

18.2.1 Current Alarms


The <Current Alarms> tab displays all active alarms, and is updated when a new alarm
occurs. This window displays the most current alarms. Alarms are listed in the order from the
oldest to the newest with the oldest one listed at the bottom of the list. Each entry is
highlighted with the color associated with its severity. This color coding allows the user to
perform a quick visual inspection when all alarms are displayed.
When an alarm clears, the date and time when it was cleared is added to the list, and the
color is changes to green. It is removed to active cleared alarm window.
Using TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT the user can:
• Change the alarm list to display different severities or multiple severities
• View the alarm occuring on different managed objects
• Sort the alarm list by field
• Clear the alarm list
• Refresh the alarm list
• View current alarm events from the chassis view

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 235


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

18.2.2 Viewing Active Alarms


The alarm windows launched using different methods will show the alarms that are occuring
on different managed objects.
To view the active alarms:
Choose an object (a card or a port), and select <Fault>Æ<Active Alarms> from the main
menu. (See Fig. 18.1) The alarm window will only show alarms that are occuring on the
currently selected managed object. If neither a card nor a port is selected, the alarm window
will show all alarms on the current NE.

Fig. 18.1 Open Active Alarms from Main Menu

Right-click an object (a card or a port), and select <Active Alarms> in the pop-up menu. (See
Fig. 18.2) The alarm window will only show alarms occurring on the currently selected
managed object.

Fig. 18.2 Open Active Alarms from Right-click Menu

236 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

To refresh only the alarms of interest, click on the appropriate icons on the <Alarm count by
severity> section in the main window. (See Fig. 18.3) The alarm window launched here will
show all alarms on current NE with the specific severity and category.

Fig. 18.3 Alarm Count by Severity

The <Active Alarms> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.4)

Fig. 18.4 Active Alarms

18.2.3 Reviewing the Current Alarms


The information contained in the Active Alarms tab is as follows:

Field or Button Description


Severity The severity level of the alarm
Category The related category of the specific alarm, including:
Process Error
QoS
Transmission
Equipment
Environment
Source The managed object that generates the reported alarm
Alarm Message The name of the alarm
Raised Time The time the alarm was raised (according to the clock on the
NE)
Acknowledged By The user who acknowledged this alarm
Acknowledged Time The time the alarm was acknowledged. (according to the clock
of the client)
Cleared Time The time when the alarm was cleared.
ClearStatus The status of the alarm. This includes: Cleared, Cleared

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 237


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Field or Button Description


manually, Cleared Synchronized or Not Cleared.
Tab. 18.1 Active Alarms Information

i Note: Active alarms are organized into pages. One page can display at most 2000 alarms.

18.2.4 Viewing Alarm Detail


To know more information about one alarm, select this alarm and double-click it. Or select
this alarm and click <Detail>. Then the <Alarm Detail> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.5)
The corresponding description about this alarm will appear in this window.

Fig. 18.5 Alarm Detail

18.2.5 Clearing Alarms


To clear the alarm in the Current Alarms window, right-click the corresponding alarm, and
select <Clear Alarm>. (See Fig. 18.6)
As a result, the alarm disappears from current alarm window and is recorded to the active
cleared alarm window and the color becomes green. The clear status should be <Cleared
Manually>.

Fig. 18.6 Clear Alarm

238 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

18.2.6 Alarm Search


Click the <Search> button in the <Active Alarms> window or the <History Alarms> window,
the <Alarm Search> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.7)

Fig. 18.7 Alarm Search

<Severity> − Can be set as <All>, <Critical>, <Major>, <Minor>, or <Warning>.


<Category> − Can be set as <All>, <Communication>, <Qos>, <Equipment>, <Processing
Error>, or <Environment>.
Click the <Source>>> button, the <Alarm Source Config> window will appear. (See Fig.
18.12)
<Alarm Message> − Can be set as all kinds of alarm message needed.
<ClearStatus> − Can be set as <All>, <NotCleared>, <Cleared Manually>, <Cleared
Synchronized>, or <Cleared>.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the active alarms search result will appear in the
<Active Alarm Search Result> window. (See Fig. 18.13)
Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch online help.

18.2.7 History Alarms


To view the history alarms:
Choose an object (a card or a port), and select <Fault>→<History Alarms> from the main
menu. (See Fig. 18.8) The alarm window will only show alarms have occurred on currently
selected managed object. If neither a card nor a port is selected, the alarm window would
show all alarms on current NE.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 239


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.8 Open History Alarms from Main Menu

Right-click an object (a card or a port), and select <History Alarms> in the pop-up menu.
(See Fig. 18.9)The alarm window will only show alarms have occurred on currently selected
managed object.

Fig. 18.9 Open History Alarms from Right-click Menu

The <History Alarms> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.10)

Fig. 18.10 History Alarms

240 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

To know more information about one history alarm, select this alarm and double-click it or
highlight it and click <Detail>.
i Note: Alarms are shown in several pages and one page can display at most 2000 alarms.

Click the <Search> button and the <Alarm Search> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.11)

Fig. 18.11 Alarm Search

<Severity> − This can be set as <All>, <Critical>, <Major>, <Minor>, or <Warning>.


<Category> − This can be set as <All>, <Communication>, <Qos>, <Equipment>,
<Processing Error>, or <Environment>.
<Alarm Message> − This can be set as all kinds of alarm message needed.
<ClearStatus> − This can be set as <all>, <NotCleared>, <Cleared Manually>, <Cleared
Synchronized>, or <Cleared>.

Click the Source>> button, the <Alarm Source Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.12)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 241


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.12 Alarm Source Config

Type in the NE Label, and select options from the <NE IP>, <Slot Number>, <Card Type>,
<Port Number>, and <CTP Type> drop-down menus. Click <Apply> and <OK> to confirm the
changes and close the window.
In the <Alarm Search> window:
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the active alarms search result will appear in the
<Active Alarm Search Result> window.
Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

Fig. 18.13 Active Alarm Search Result

18.3 LED Indicators


A SURPASS hiT 7060 NE has four LED status indicators that show the operational status of
the system.
• PWR (Power)
• CR (Critical Alarm)
• MJ (Major Alarm)

242 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

• MIN (Minor Alarm)


These LEDs correspond to the LED status indicators displayed in the chassis view.
The following table describes four LED status indicators.
LED name LED Color LED Description
Status
Power Green On 1. For Power cards, when a valid external
power source is available, this LED will be
on.
2. For other cards, Power is available on the
card/system. It indicates present internal
power supply.
Off Power is not available due to a broken power
converter or external power cable or
connector.
Critical Red On One or more critical non-communication
alarms are present.
Flashing One or more critical or major alarms are
present (for example, service affecting—
LOS).
Off No critical alarms are present, and
card/system is in service.
Major Orange On There are one or more major alarms present.
Flashing When any optional service card is mismatch
or faulty, Major alarm LED and Critical alarm
LED will flash at the same time.
Off No Major alarms.
Minor Yellow On There are one or more minor alarms present
(non-service affecting).
Off No Minor alarms.
Note: Warning and indeterminate alarms do
not turn on the LED.
Tab. 18.2 LED Status

18.4 Exporting Alarms

18.4.1 Exporting Active Alarms to a File


To export the active alarm list:
On the menu bar, select <Fault>Æ<Active Alarm>, and the <Active Alarms> window will
display.
Click <Print>. The <Print> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.14)

Fig. 18.14 Report Alarms

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 243


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Select Paper type.


Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>.
Select Output file type.
i Note: Don’t select <System Printer> here.

Click <OK>.
The <Print Preview> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.15)

Fig. 18.15 Report Alarms Preview

Click <Print>. The <Save File> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.16)

Fig. 18.16 Save File

Input the file name in the <File Name> edit box. Click <Save>.
Active Alarms are now successively exported to file.

244 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

18.4.2 Printing Active Alarms


To print the active alarm list:
On the menu bar, select <Fault>→<Active Alarm>.
The <Active Alarms> window will display.
Right-click the mouse and select <Print Alarm>.
The <Print> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.17)

Fig. 18.17 Print Alarms

Select Page type.


Select Portrait or Landscape.
Select Output as <System Printer>.
Click <OK>.
The page preview window will appear. (See Fig. 18.18)

Fig. 18.18 Print Alarms Preview

Click <Print>. The print setup window will appear. (See Fig. 18.19)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 245


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.19 Print Setup

Select and set up the printer if necessary, and then click <OK>.
Alarms are now successively printed.

18.5 Configuring Fault Management

18.5.1 Audio Alarm Configuration


To configure the Audio Alarm Configuration:
Select <System>Æ< Alarm Audio Configure> from the main menu. (See Fig. 18.20)

Fig. 18.20 Open Alarm Audio Configure from main menu

The <Audio Alarm Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.21)

246 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.21 Audio Alarm Configuration

Select whether Audio Alarm is enabled or disabled.


Set the specific audio file to correspond with the varying alarms.
Choose the Edit the Alarm audio play times.
Click <OK> to confirm the configuration and close the window.
Click <Cancel> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.

18.5.2 Alarm Type List Management


By using Alarm Type List Management the user can view and configure alarms.
From the main menu, select <Fault> Æ<Alarm Type List Management> to enter the <Alarm
Type Management> window. (See Fig. 18.22 and Fig. 18.23)

Fig. 18.22 Open Alarm Type Management from Main Menu

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 247


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.23 Alarm Type List Management

Click <Refresh> to view current alarm type list. On the desired field, modify the <User
Defined Severity> field by highlighting a row and right-clicking the corresponding field. (See
Fig. 18.24)

Fig. 18.24 Modify User Defined Severity of Alarm

It will change the value in NE’s MIB if user modify the user defined severity.
Click <Refresh> to view the latest alarm type list.
Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.
Click <OK> to confirm the changes and close the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Print> to print the result.

248 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Help> to launch the online help.

18.6 Alarm Configuration for Single NE

18.6.1 AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration


From the main menu, select <Fault>→<AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration>.
The <TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.25)

Fig. 18.25 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration

When <Query> is clicked, two trees will be shown for AIS and RDI alarms respectively. Each
tree has the same node structure as below:
NE Node
|___ Card Node
|___ Port Node
|___ TP Node
There is some logic while clicking the tree nodes. That is, after clicked any node on the tree,
the tree will take a global check to make sure that the selection state of other nodes will be
changed accordingly. (See Tab. 18.3)

Clicked Node Action Effect to Other Nodes


NE Node Change to the contrary selection All of its offspring nodes (Card /
state. Port / TP Nodes) will keep the
If the ne node is half-selected same selection state with that of
before, it will change to be this node.
selected after clicking.
Card Node Change to the contrary selection All of its offspring nodes (Port / TP
state. Nodes) will keep the same

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 249


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Clicked Node Action Effect to Other Nodes


If the card node is half-selected selection state with that of this
before, it will change to be node.
selected after clicking.
Port Node Change to the contrary selection All of its offspring nodes (TP
state. Nodes) will keep the same
If the port node is half-selected selection state with that of this
before, it will change to be node. Its parent card node will
selected after clicking. change the state accordingly.
TP Node Change to the contrary selection Its parent card node and port
state. node will change the state
accordingly.
Tab. 18.3 AIS/RDI Alarm Tree Nodes Selection Logic

Click <Apply> to confirm the setting.


Click <OK> to confirm your change and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

18.6.2 Alarm Inhibit Configuration


From the main menu, select <Fault>→<Alarm Inhibit Configuration>.
The <Alarm Inhibition Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.26)

Fig. 18.26 Alarm Inhibit Configuration – for port

Click to expand all the branches, or to collapse all the branches.

Check or uncheck the checkbox to the left of a port to enable or disable the Alarm Inhibit
property of the port.

250 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Click <Refresh> to get the latest setting.


Click <Apply> to confirm the settings.
Click <OK> to confirm and finish all the modifications.
Click <Cancel> to quit this modification without any changes.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

18.6.3 Alarm Out Configuration


From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<Alarm Out Configuration>.
The <Alarm Out Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.27)

Fig. 18.27 Alarm Out Configuration

Select <Alarm Out Suppress> to temporarily cutoff alarm out.


Select <Alarm Out Cutoff> to cutoff alarm out permanently.
Select <Enable CR/MJ Alarm Out> to enable CR/MJ alarm out.
Select <Enable Minor Alarm Out> to enable minor alarm out.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest setting.


Click <Apply> to confirm the setting.
Click <OK> to confirm the changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

18.6.4 AIS/RDI Alarm configuration


From the main menu, select <Fault>Æ<AIS/RDI Configuration>.
The < TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration > window will appear. (See Fig. 18.28)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 251


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.28 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration

In this window there are two panels: AIS Configuration and RDI Configuration.
Click <Query> to view all the tree nodes of both AIS and RDI.
Select those nodes whoes alarms you want to enable in each panel via checkbox before the
node
Click <Apply> to put the setting into effect immediately.
Click <OK> to Confirm changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to Quit dialog, and all the unsaved modifications will be lost.
Click <Help> to Launch the online help.

18.6.5 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration


From the main menu, select <Fault>Æ<Alarm Persistent Time Configuration>.
The <Alarm Persistent Time Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.29)

Fig. 18.29 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration

252 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

In the drop-down menu, select the persistent time values for both Alarm Detection Persistent
Time and Alarm Cleaning Persistent Time. Both of them range from 1 to 20s, and have 2s
and 10s as default value respectively.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest setting.


Click <Apply> to confirm the setting.
Click <OK> to confirm the changes and quit the window.
Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

18.6.6 MDI/MDO Configuration


From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<MDI/MDO Configuration>.
The <MDI/MDO Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.30)

Fig. 18.30 MDI Configuration

MDI1-MDI3’s status can be set with <Disabled> or <Enabled> in this window.


Click the <MDO> tab to configure the MDO properties. (See Fig. 18.31

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 253


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.31 MDO Configuration

In the drop-down menu, select <MDO 0-1> and change corresponding status.
In the field of Alarm List, select corresponding alarm and click the <== button or the ==>
button to change the associated property of this alarm.
Click <Apply> to confirm the setting.

18.7 Displaying the Node Event Log


To display the Node Event Log, select <Fault>Æ<Events> from the main menu.
The <Events> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.32)

254 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.32 Node Event Log

Click <Print> to export all the events listed in the window to a file or print it. The detailed
steps of exporting events are the same as those of alarms. (Refer to Chapter 18.4)

18.7.1 Interpreting the Node Event Log


There are three types of events defined in the system: Management, Hardware, and
Software. The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT time-stamps every event and logs the
event to a log file. The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT displays the system events
through Event/Alarm Manager. Events listed in the event log detail the time and date the
event occurred, the name of the event, the type of event, and a short description of the event.
The Event about the communication between NE and LCT is recorded by LCT itself rather
than getting from NE.
Events are purely informational and indicate changes in the status of the system related to
the management and administration of the system, such as a user logging onto the node or
a change to configuration options.

18.7.2 Management Events


The attributes of the management events should at least include: Event name, Timestamp,
User name and privilege level, and Description.
Name Description
User login Identifies the user that has just logged in.
User logout Identifies the user that has just logged out.
User auto-logout due to timeout Identifies the user that was just logged out by the
system because of inactivity.
User password change The password of a user account has been changed.
Unauthorized login attempt A user has attempted but failed to log in.
Alarm log cleared A user has cleared out the alarm log file.
Event log cleared A user has cleared out the event log file.
System time changed according to The system time is adjusted from yyyy:mm:dd,
the NTP server time hh:mm:ss to yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 255


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

System time changed by manual The system time is adjusted from yyyy:mm:dd,
configuration hh:mm:ss to yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss.
NTP function is changed
Connect to NTP server failure When NTP function is enable, this event will be
reported as long as the communication is failure.
Connect to NTP server successfully When NTP function is enable, this event will be
reported as long as the communication is success.
Tab. 18.4 Management Events

18.7.3 Hardware Events


The object (located as precisely as possible) that generates the event should also be
reported.

Name Description
Card booted The card has been booted.
Card reset The card has been reset.
Card disabled The card has been disabled.
Card deleted The card has been deleted from the configuration.
Card removed The card has been removed from its slot.
Latch Switch Opened The latch switch (if any) of the card is opened.
SFP changed The SFP module has been changed. (The SFP module is
allowed to be pulled out or plugged in.)
Tab. 18.5 Hardware Events

18.7.4 Software Events


Name Description
Software Download started Software files are being downloaded to the backup storage
place through FTP.
Software Download Software files are successfully downloaded to the backup
completed/failure storage place through FTP.
Software Upgrade started The software files in the backup storage place has started
being activiated.
Software Upgrade A software upgrade has completed.
completed/failure
MIB Upload started The MIB files in the backup place are being uploaded to a
server through FTP.
MIB Upload The MIB files in the backup place have been successfully
completed/failure uploaded through FTP.
MIB Download started The MIB files are being downloaded from a server to the
MIB backup place through FTP.
MIB Download The MIB files have been successfully downloaded from a
completed/failure server to the MIB backup place through FTP.
MIB Backup started The active MIB files are being backup-ed.
MIB Backup The active MIB files have been backup-ed.
completed/failure
MIB Restore started The MIB files in the backup place are being restored to
active MIB files.
MIB Restore The MIB restoration has successfully completed.
completed/failure
MIB Clear started The MIB in selected NE is starting clearing
MIB Clear completed/failure The MIB clearing is completed/failure
MIB file is failure MIB file detection will be done during the NE initial
procedure. If the checksum in a MIB file is wrong, this event

256 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

will be reported after system start up.


Boot Image Upgrade This event is reported when Boot Image is upgraded
completed successfully during SW switching.
Boot Image Upgrade failure This event is reported when Boot Image is upgraded failure
during SW switching.
Free space is not enough in This event is reported when the usage of CF card is more
CF card than 95%. (CF card can not be written any long)
Space is released in CF This event is reported when the usage of CF card is less
card than 90% (CF card can be written again)
Primary load copy from CF This event is reported when system is failed to load
to SC succeeded Software from boot flash
Primary load copy from CF This event is reported when system is failed to load
to SC failed Software from boot flash
System reset The system has been reset.
System start The system is starting up.
Timing configuration One or more timing sources or references are changed.
changed
Timing status changed One or more timing sources or references are changed.
Tab. 18.6 Software Events

18.7.5 Event Search


Click <Search> in the <Events> window, the <Event Search> window will appear. (See Fig.
18.33)

Fig. 18.33 Event Search

To set the ID range, check the <ID(>=)> or <ID(<=)> boxes and input ID range in the
corresponding fields.
To set the raised time range, check the <Raised Time(After)> or <Raised Time(Before)>
boxes and input or select the date from the drop-down menus.
When searching events using the <Event Description> field, the LCT can support a wildcard
search by using *,such as using *aaa* to search events which contain the string “aaa”.
Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the searchs result will appear in the <Event
Search Result> window . (See Fig. 18.34)
Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 257


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 18.34 Event Search Result

i Note: Events are shown in several pages and one page can display at most 2000 alarms.

258 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

19 Resource and Database Management

19.1 NE Usage Statistics


From the main menu, select <Configuration>Æ<NE Resource Usage Statistics>. An <NE
SDH Resource Usage Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.1)

Fig. 19.1 NE SDH Resource Usage Statistics

All the cards and ports (except the data card) and their usages are listed in this table. Select
one port, the details of this port will be listed in the table below.
Click <Statistic> to check the latest information of the ports.
Click <Print> to print the statistic status.
Click <Close> to quit the window.
Click <Help> to launch the online help.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 259


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

20 How To

20.1 Creating a TU12 Cross-Connection between STM-16 and STM-


1
1. Set TP Mapping
To create a Cross Connection, first set the corresponding TP mapping according to the
capacity of the Cross Connection to make sure that the slot mapping satisfies the cross
connection requirements. The default slot mapping of SDH ports in SDH card is AU-4.
Therefore, to create a TU12 connection between those two cards, the user need refer to the
following steps to change AU-4 mapping to TU12 mapping.

Step1: Select <Configuration>Æ<TP Multiplexing Structure> from the main menu, then a
<TP Multiplexing Structure> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.1)

Fig. 20.1 TP Multiplexing Structure

Step2: Select #1LC8<4×STM-4(1)> and the corresponding port, and then click <Query>.
The querying result is shown in window. (See Fig. 20.2)

Fig. 20.2 Query Result

Step3: Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu or click the minus sign to collapse the
tree menu. Another option is to right-click the catalog name and then select <Expand> in the

260 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

pop-up menu to expand this function’s next catalog. Selecting <Expand All> also expands all
the catalogs under this function. (See Fig. 20.3)

Fig. 20.3 Expanding Tree Graph

Step4: If the slot is idle it is blue and if it is occupied it is orange. Notice that a slot mapping
can be modified only when it’s idle.
Step5: Right-click an idle AU-4 slot, select <Mapping AU-4 (1)> Æ<AU-4 To TUG-3> in the
pop-up menu, then click <Apply>. The TP mapping between AU-4 and TU12 is complete.

Fig. 20.4 Mapping AU4 to TU12

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 261


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

The following picture is the modified TU12 slot.

Fig. 20.5 Result of Mapping

i Note: if needed, the TU12 slot can be modified into AU-4, but all 63 TU12 slots must be idle.
Right-click the AU-4 catalog to be modified, and select <Mapping AU-4(1)> Æ <AU-4 Clear
Channel>, and then click <Apply> to complete the configuration.

Fig. 20.6 Mapping TU12 to AU4

262 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

2. Create New Cross-Connection


Step1: Select <Configuration>→<Cross-Connect Management> from the main menu, and
the <Cross-Connect Management> window will appear, or select the Cross-Connect board
in the chassis view, right-click it, then select <Cross-Connect management> in the pop-up
menu.

Fig. 20.7 Cross-Connect Management Menu

Fig. 20.8 Cross-Connect Management

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 263


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step2: Click <Create>, and the <Create Cross-Connect> window will appear.

Fig. 20.9 Create Cross-Connect

Step3: Select the property of the cross connection to be created in this drop-down menu:
<Capacity> is <VC-12>.
<Direction> is <Bi-Direction>. <Bi-direction> means configuration to both source and
destination, which is the mainly application. <Uni-direction> means source and destination
configuration respectively.
Source card is #LC7<1× STM-16(Line)>; source port is P01; destination card is
#LC10<2×STM-1(Line)>; and destination port is P01.
Step4: Under the source port and destination port all available slots will be displayed (if the
slot has been taken, or the slot mapping is different from the capacity of the cross connection,
then it will not be shown).

264 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step5: Select a slot in the source and destination respectively, and then click <Apply>. The
user can also select many slots to create many cross connections. This is done by holding
the <Shift> key and then clicking to select many successive slots, or holding the <Ctrl> key
and then clicking to select many independent slots.

Fig. 20.10 Create Cross-Connect window

20.2 Creating Timing Synchronized Network


Fig. 20.11 shows a ring network composed of three TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 NEs. In
this network, clock-in port on the NE-A SI is connected to a 2Mbit/s station clock with a
precision of PRC. The other two NEs receive timing information from the STM-4 line signal
connected to NE-A so they are synchronized with NE-A. An example of how to use the
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage these three NE’s timing will be illustrated.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 265


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

2Mbit/s StationClock with a


precision of PRC

NE-A

NE-B NE-C

Fig. 20.11 Three (3) Node Ring

When using the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage the timing of NE-A, refer to
the following steps:

Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<Synchronization Management> from the main menu. A


<Synchronization Management> window will appear. Or select the cross-connection card,
right click it, then select <Synchronization Management> in the pop-up menu.

Fig. 20.12 Synchronization Management

Step 2: Click <Global Setting> in the <Synchronization Management> window, and the
<Global Settings> window will appear.

266 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.13 Synchronization Management

Step 3: Choose <Enabled> in the <QL Mode> drop-down menu. Choose <PRC(0×2)>,
<SSU-A(0×4)>, <SSU-B(0×8)>, or SEC(0×0B)> from the <Expected_QL> drop-down menu.
Click <Apply> and <Close>. Choose <Enabled> or <Disabled> in the <Frequence Offset
Monitor Mode> drop-down menu.

Step 4: Click <Station Clock> in the <Synchronization Management> window. The <Station
Clock Setting> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.14)

Fig. 20.14 Station Clock Setting

Step 5: Click <Signal Type> and set it to 2Mbit/s Framed. Click <Apply>, and then click
<Close> to quit the window.

Step 6: The system sets the #T1<Timing Input>1 to reference the timing source in the
default condition. If #T1<Timing Input>1 is not set to the reference timing source, select
#T1<Timing Input>1, then right-click it and select <Add> in the pop-up menu to add it to the
reference source. Next, double-click the #T1<Timing Input>1 reference as shown in Fig.
20.12. The <TimingSource Reference Properties Settings> window will appear as shown in
Fig. 20.15.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 267


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.15 Timing Source Reference Properties

Step 7: Click <Priority> and set it to 1; click <QL Provisioned Mode> and set it to
<Provisioning>; click <QL(Quality Level)> and set it to <PRC(0×2)>. Click <Apply> and then
click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 8: If there are other reference timing resources in timing resources information (See Fig.
20.16), select the reference timing source right-click, and click <Remove> in the pop-up
window to remove the reference timing resource. Please remove all timing resources except
#T1<Timing Input>1.

Fig. 20.16 Remove Timing Source Reference

Step 9: Click <System Clock> in Fig. 20.12. The <System Clock> window will appear. (See
Fig. 20.17)

268 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.17 System Clock

Step 10: Select <AutoSelection> in <Operation Mode>, and click <Set Mode>. Auto
Selection denotes that the clock has its frequency phase locked to an input reference signal.
Click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 11: Timing management of NE has been completed. The result is shown in Fig. 20.18.

Fig. 20.18 Timing Results

After configuring NE-A’s time source, the following section introduces how to use TNMS-M
SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage NE-B timing.
Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<Synchronization management> from the main menu, a
<Synchronization Management> window will appear as which is shown in Fig. 20.19.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 269


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.19 Synchronization Management

Step 2: The system has set #LC9<2×STM-1>Port1 and #LC10<2×STM-1>Port1 to reference


timing sources automatically in default condition (the system can admit 4 reference timing
sources simultaneously). If there is no setting, select them respectively, click <Add> to add
them to the reference timing sources. Double-click #LC9<2×STM-1>Port3 reference, and a
<Timing Source Reference Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.20)

Fig. 20.20 Timing Source Reference Management

Step 3: Click <Priority> and set it to 1; click <QL Provisioned Mode> and set it to Auto; click
<Apply>, then click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 4: If there is another link between NE-B and NE-A by #LC9<2×STM-1> Port1 of NE-B,
refer to step 3 and step 4, set reference timing source #LC9<2×STM-1> Port1, please note
that this reference timing source’s priority should be set to 2. If there are other reference
timing resources in timing resources, select the reference timing source, right-click ,and click

270 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

<Remove> in the pop-up window to remove the reference timing resource. Please remove
all timing resources except #LC9<2×STM-1> Port1.

Step 5: Click <System Clock> in Fig. 20.19, The <System Clock> window will appear. Select
<AutoSelection> in operation mode, and then click <Set Mode>. Click <Close> to quit the
window.

Step 6: Timing management of NE-B has been completed.

Fig. 20.21 Synchronization Management

NE-C timing configuration is the same as NE-B configuration steps. The network-timing
configuration is now completed.

20.3 Configure Layer 2 100Mbps Ethernet Service


This example will illustrate how to configure L2 LCAS 100M Ethernet Service. Here 6×FE/L2
board is used in this example to show how to configure this service. Not all data board card
support “bridge configuration“, for example, 8×FE/L2 does not support this function

Step1: Set Bridge’s property of NE


Right-click a data board card (such as 6× FE/L2), and the configuration menu will pop up
(see Fig. 20.22). Click <Bridge Configuration>, and then the <Bridge Properties> window will
appear. (See Fig. 20.23)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 271


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.22 Bridge Configuration Tab

Fig. 20.23 Bridges Properties

In the <Bridge Mode> field, there are two options: <Double Tag> (default value) and <IEEE
802>. Generally, <Double Tag> is chosen. If the double tag mode is chosen, the PVID must
be set on LAN ports. (Refer to Step 2).

Step 2: Configure LAN port of NE


Select <LAN Ports Property Configuration> (see Fig. 20.22), and the corresponding window
will appear (see Fig. 20.24). Since there are many LAN ports in every data card, click <Port>

272 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

in the top right corner of the window. Then select the corresponding port in the drop-down
menu (the first LAN port is chosen in this example).

Fig. 20.24 LAN Port Property Configuration

The parameters that usually need to set are as follows:


<PVID>: A default VLAN identification to the signal at the LAN port. The optional value is
from 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094. If the <Bridge Mode> is set to be <Double Tag> in step 1,
the PVID must be set on LAN ports.
<Monitored Mode> – Can be set as <Auto>, <Monitor>, or <Non-Monitor>.
<Admin Mode> – Can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>.
<Auto Laser Shutdown> – Can be set as <No> or <Yes>.
<Egress Tag Mode> – Can be set as <Untag> or <Tag>.
Check <BRL Enable> to make the BRL available, note that BRL cannot be configured in
default configuration.
In the <Auto-Negotiation Parameter> section, if selecting <Enable> in the <Auto
Negotiation> field, the other three parameters will turn grey. If not, setup these three
parameters manually.
Click <Apply> and <Close> to complete the LAN port configuration.

Step 3: Configure WAN port of NE


Select <WAN Ports Property Configuration> in Fig. 20.22, and the <WAN Port Config>
window will appear. (See Fig. 20.25) Since there are many WAN ports in every data card,

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 273


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

click <Port> in the top right corner of the window, and select the corresponding port in the
drop-down menu (the first WAN port is chosen in the example).

Fig. 20.25 WAN Port Configuration

The following parameters need to be set:


<PVID>: Add a private VLAN mark to the signal at the WAN port. The optional value is from
1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094.
<Egress Tag Mode>: There are two optional values: <Untag> and <Tag>. Usually the default
is <Tag> mode, which ensures that additional PVID can be mapped to the load of SDH when
the signals leave the data card from WAN port.
<Bandwidth Management>: Select the <LCAS Enable> mode. There are two options:
<LCAS Enable> and <LCAS Disable>. Select <Enable LCAS> to enable the Ethernet’s
traffic bandwidth which the user requires to be adjusted in accordance with the network
When the bandwidth configuration mode is confirmed, click <Bandwidth Management> to
assign the capacity of WAN port. The <Bandwidth Management> window will appear. (See
Fig. 20.26)

274 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.26 Bandwidth Management

There are two options in the <Direction> field: <bi-direction> and <uni-direction>. Bi-direction
means configuration to both source and destination, which is the typical application. Uni-
direction means source and destination configuration respectively.
There are two options in the <TP Type> field: <VC3> and <VC12>, while for 2GE+8×FE/AE
card there’s no <TP Type>.
The slots in the optional AUG in the left side are idle (the slots which haven’t been taken).
The slots shown in the right side is the slots configured to this WAN port. Select 46 AUGs in
the left side, and click the ==> button to add the slots used by those ports to WAN port. To
decrease the number of slots used by this port, select corresponding slots in the right side
and click the <== button.
Click <Apply> to confirm the settings.
Click <OK> to close this window and return to the <WAN Port Config> window.
Click <Apply> and <Close> to complete the WAN port configurations.

Step 4: Set VLAN management of NE


Through VLAN management, PVIDs can be set to pass the WAN port. If the double tag
mode is chosen in step 1, the PVID must be set on LAN ports.
Select <VLAN management> as shown in Fig. 20.22, and the corresponding window will
appear. (See Fig. 20.27)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 275


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.27 VLAN Management

Click <VLAN Configuration>, and then the <VLAN Configuration> window will appear. (See
Fig. 20.28)

Fig. 20.28 VLAN Configuration

276 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

There are two ways to modify VLAN: <Based on VLAN> and <Based on Ports>. To
configure multiple ports with the same VLAN ID, the <Based on VLAN> mode is
recommended. To configure a port with multiple VLAN IDs, the <Based on Ports> mode is
recommended. Here the <Based on VLAN> mode is chosen.
Enter VLAN ID, then click <Port List> to have all available ports listed in the left side. Select
the configured WAN port from the optional ports on the left side and click the ==> button to
move it to optional ports. Input the VLAN ID configured for the selected port in the blank of
<VLAN ID>. If needed, the VLAN ID can be named and inputted to the <VLAN Name> blank
to help remember.
Click <Apply> to confirm the settings.
Click <Close> to close the window.
Note: To query VLAN ID of all the ports of data unit, click <Query> in the <VLAN
i Management> window (see Fig. 20.27). Detailed information will appear in the figure.

Fig. 20.29 VLAN Management: Query Result

Step 5: Create Cross Connection


After completing the Ethernet settings, a cross connection needs to be created between the
SDH port and the Ethernet port.
To open the <Cross-Connect Management> window, select <Configuration>Æ<Cross-
Connect Management> from the main menu, or select the cross-connect and synchronize
unit board in the Chassis View, right-click it, then select <Cross-Connect Management> in
the pop-up menu.
Click <Create>, and then the <Create Cross-Connect> window will appear.
Select the properties for this cross connection using the drop-down menus: capacity is VC-
12; Direction is bi-direction; source card is #LC7<1×STM-16>; source port is P01; destination
card is #LC2<6×FE(L2)>; destination port is vP01(S1). Select 46 slots in left and 46 slots of
WAN port configured in step1 in the right panel.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 277


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.30 Create Cross-Connect

Click <Apply> to create those Cross Connections. Click <OK> to close this window. Those
Cross Connections will appear in the <Cross-Connect Management> window. Now, the
layer2 Ethernet service is configured successfully. Click <Close> to close the <Cross-
Connect Management> window.

278 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.31 Cross-Connect Management

20.4 Monitoring One STM-16 Port Current Performance


Step 1: From the main menu, select <Performance>Æ<Current SDH Performance> to open
the <SDH Performance Monitoring> window. (See Fig. 20.33)

Fig. 20.32 Current SDH Performance Tab

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 279


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.33 SDH Current Performance

Step 2: Click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

Fig. 20.34 Monitor Point Filter

Step 3: Click <Add> in the <Selected TPs> section and the <Select Terminal Point> window
will appear.

280 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step 4: Select #CC2_LC<1×STM-16(4)> in the <Card> drop-down, <P01> in the Port item,
and <All> in the <TP Type>. Click <Refresh>; all selected TPs will be listed. To monitor only
one TP type, select the corresponding type in this table. Choose TPs to be monitored and
click <OK> to complete TP selection.

Fig. 20.35 Select Terminal Point

Step 5: Select parameters to monitor, and click <OK>. The current Port01 performance for
this STM-16 card will be listed.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 281


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.36 Monitor Point Filter

Fig. 20.37 SDH Current Performance

Click <Refresh>, to monitor the latest performance of this port.

282 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

20.5 Creating Multiplex-Section Protection between Two NEs


In linear Multiplex Section Protection (MSP), there are two physical paths between two
multiplexors. The working section and protection section between multiplexors is connected
using different optical interfaces. TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 supports MSP protection at
STM-4 and STM-1 rates.

NE-A NE-B

Fig. 20.38 Point-to-point System

Fig. 20.38 illustrates a point-to-point system between NE-A and NE-B. The working signal is
transmitted through a pair of STM-4 ports while the protection signal is transmitted through
another pair of STM-4 ports. To implement transmission protection, first the protection
groups should be established in the NE to realize the connection between the working path
and the protection path.
Step1: Select <Configuration>→<MSP Management> from the main menu. The <MSP
Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.39)

Fig. 20.39 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management

Step2: Click <Create> and the <Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group> window
will appear (See Fig. 20.40). Fill out the <Properties> section. The <Protection Group Label>
provides a name for the protection group (for example <test> in Fig. 20.40); the <Switching
Direction> can be selected as <unidirectional switch> or <bidirectional switch>; the
<Operation Mode> can be selected as <non-revertive> or <revertive> with the <Wait to
Restore> time between 0-720 seconds. Select #LC1<4×STM-4(1)> and P02 in the Working
Multiplex Section. The System will fill out the Protection Multiplex Section with
#LC1<4×STM-4(1)> and P04 automatically.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 283


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.40 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group

Step3: Click <OK> to finish creating MSP, and created protection groups will appear in the
<MSP Management> window, double-click this protection group to see the detail information.

Fig. 20.41 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management

20.6 Creating SNCP Using 2 Ports of STM-1


Sub-Network Connection Protection (SNCP) provides protection at VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv/ VC-
12-Xv levels. In the transmission end, service is bridged to two output ports; the two signals
are transmitted to the destination via different routes. One is main channel and the other is
the backup channel. In the receiving end, the NE selects a better signal from the two coming
signals. When the main channel has failed a system will switch to the protection SNCP
channel to receive services.
To describe how to configure SNCP protection, an example of a four-node ring is shown in
Fig. 20.42. Assume that a VC-4 connection between NE-A and NE-C needs to be
established. The working channel is from NE-A, NE-B, to NE-C. The protection channel is
from NE-A, NE-D, to NE-C.

284 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.42 SNCP Example

To implement the SNCP, configure each NE as follows:


Create a bi-directional VC-4 level cross-connection between an STM-1 unit port and a LC2
port AU4 of NE-A.
Create a bi-directional VC-4 level cross connection between the first LC1 port AU4 and the
first LC2 port AU4 of NE D.
Create a bi-directional cross connection on the VC-4 level between an STM-1 unit port and
the first LC1 port AU4 of NE C.

The following example is provided to create SNCP protection group using the TNMS-M
SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:
Step1: Select <Configuration>→<SNCP Management> from the main menu, the <SNCP
Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.43)

Fig. 20.43 SNCP Management

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 285


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step2: Click <Create> and the <Create and Config SNCP> window will appear. (See Fig.
20.44) Click the <Capacity> drop-down menu and select VC-4. Select <Bidirectional> in the
<Direction> dropdown menu. Set <Non-Revertive> in the <Restore Mode> dropdown menu.

Set the parameters in the Working TP section as:


Working Card: #LC1<4×STM-4(1)>
Working Port: P01
By Time Slot: AU4 (#02)
The working TP is the slot of the working channel cross-connection line port in NE-A.
Set the parameters in the Protection TP section as:
Protecting Card: #LC2<4× STM-4/(1)>
Protecting Port: P01
By Time Slot: AU4 (#02)

Fig. 20.44 Create and Config SNCP

Step3: Click <Apply> and the SNCP is created successfully. For NE-A, the original bi-
direction cross-connect provides the channel protection function. NE-A sends the signal to
both line ports LC1 and LC2 simultaneously and selects the better one from the two received
signals from LC1 and LC2. (See Fig. 20.45)

286 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.45 SNCP Protection of NE A

Note: The way to create channel protection of NE-C is the same as that in NE-A. The
i difference is the working TP and protection TP are opposite to those of NE-A.
After creation of the SNCP protection group, click <Query> in Fig. 20.43 to view the existing
SNCP protection group. Select the corresponding protection group, and click <Switch>. The
<SNCP Switch> window will appear (See Fig. 20.46). In this window the condition of the
current protection group is known. In the meantime, the protection switch operation for the
SNCP protection group is done manually by clicking <Command List>.

Fig. 20.46 SNCP Switch

<Clear>: This command clears all commands that have been started as well as the NE
operation recovery time.
<Lock Out>: Protection switching will shut down, and the working channel will take on the
service. Even if there is malfunction, switching will not occur.
<Force Switch to Protection>: Users switch services to the protection channel by force even
if there is a fault on this channel. If the force switch requirement is not cleared, automatic
switching will not occur.
<Force Switch to Working>: User will switch service to the working channel by force even if
there is a fault on this channel. If the force switch requirement is not cleared, automatic
switching will not occur.
<Manual Switch to Protection>: Users switch services to the protection channel manually on
the condition that there is no fault on this channel. Automatic switching is still in effect.
<Manual Switch to Working>: Users switch services to working channel manually on the
condition that there is no fault on this channel. Automatic switching is still in effect.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 287


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

20.7 Creating MSSPRing Protection for STM-16 Ring


The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the function of creating and viewing
MSSPRing information. Before creating a new MSSPRING, the user must know the ring
topology and link information about the NE.

i Note: The MSSPRing function can be supported in STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64
configuration for TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060.

Follow the steps below to create a new ring with MSSRPing Protection:
Step 1: Select <Configuration>Æ<MSSPRing Management> from the main menu. The
<MSSPRing Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.47)

Fig. 20.47 MSSPRing Management

Step 2: In the < MSSPRing Management> window, click <Create>. The <Create Ring>
window will appear. (See Fig. 20.48)

Fig. 20.48 Set Ring Property

Input a number as <Ring ID> and arbitrary string as <Ring Name>. Click <OK> to set the
NEs in the ring.
Note: The maximum number of NEs in the ring is 16, and the Ring ID should be a number
i between 1 and 5000. If the information is incorrect or some items are not inputted, a warning
window will appear. (See Fig. 20.49 )

288 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.49 Warning Window

Step 3: A <Create Ring> window will appear. A number of NEs will appear on the window.
The number of NEs equals the number that the user input in the previous window. (See Fig.
20.50)

Fig. 20.50 Create Ring

Click the icon of each NE, and input the corresponding IP address in the pop-up window.
The IP address will appear below the icon of the NE. Click each of the links to set up the Link
Port properties in the pop-up window. (See Fig. 20.51) Select slot number and port number
for the local LCT from the drop-down menus of the <Link Port> panel. Input <Slot number>
and <Port Number> for the peer LCT in the <Peer Link Port> panel. Click <OK> to confirm.
After a link is correctly configured, the color of that link will turn green. (See Fig. 20.52)

Fig. 20.51 Select Link Port

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 289


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.52 Create Ring – NEs and links Successful Confugured

When all the NEs and links are configured, click <OK> in the <Create Ring> window, and a
confirmation dialog will pop up. Click <Yes> to confirm to add protection to the ring. (See Fig.
20.53)

Fig. 20.53 Confirm to add protection

Then the MSSPRING is created, and it will be listed in <MSSPRing Management> window.
(See Fig. 20.54)

Fig. 20.54 MSSPRING List

290 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

20.8 Creating 1+1 Equipment Protection for Electrical STM-1 Card


TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides 1+1 equipment protection for the electrical STM-
1 card. 1+1 Protection enhances the system reliability. It consists of one protection resource
for taking the role of the working resource of the same type in case of fault conditions or
Element Management System (EMS) requests. Equipment protection is made on a card
basis. It is used to protect against the card removal and the card failure. There must be two
same function cards available on NE at the same time.

Take the following steps to create 1+1 Equipment Protection for the electrical STM-1 card.
Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<1+1 Equipment Protection Management> from the main
menu. The <Equipment Protection Group Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.55)

Fig. 20.55 Equipment Protection Group Management

Step 2: Click the <Create> button in the <EPG Management> window. The <Create EPG>
window will appear. (See Fig. 20.56)

Fig. 20.56 Create EPG

Step 3: Select <STM-1 E> from the <Equipment Type> drop-down menu. Choose the
<Working Card> and <Protection Card> from the corresponding drop-down menu (if can be
chosen). Click <Create> to create this EPG.

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 291


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step 4: When the EPG is created, a prompt window will appear. (See Fig. 20.57)

Fig. 20.57 Create EPG – Successfully

Step 5: A new window will pop up. Click <Yes> to enable this EPG. (See Fig. 20.58)

Fig. 20.58 Enable EPG

Step 6: When the EPG is enabled, a prompt window will appear. Click <OK> to continue.
(See Fig. 20.59)

Fig. 20.59 Enable EPG – Successfully

The EPG is successfully created. It will appear in the <Equipment Protection Group
Management> window. (See Fig. 20.60)

Fig. 20.60 Create EPG – Finish

292 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

20.9 Creating RPR Service Station


Take the following steps to create an RPR service station:
Step 1: Select <RPR>→<RPR Service Configuration> from the main menu. The <RPR
Service Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.61)

Fig. 20.61 RPR Service Configuration

Input an arbitrary string of text as <Service Label> to identify the service.


Select the priority from the <Service Class> drop-down menu. The priority follows the order:
<A>, <B>, <C>.
Input a number as <Service ID> of this RPR service. The number should be an integer
between 1 and 65535.
Select the <Service Mode> from the drop-down menu. There are two available modes:
<P2P> and <MP2MP>.
Select the <Wrap Protection> mode. Available values are <enable> and <disable>.
Step 2: After you configure the basic information, click <Configuration> to add a new station
to this service. The <Add RPR Service> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.62)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 293


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.62 Add RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. Select stations and click <Add> to make the
<RPR Service Station Configuration> window appear. (See Fig. 20.63)

Fig. 20.63 RPR Service Station Configuration

Step 3: In the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window, set the following attributes:
1. <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port
2. <Servie Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and
<Port+VLAN+Prio Based>.
3. <Ringlet>: The ringlet which carries the service.
4. <Maximum Bandwidth>: Indicate how much bandwidth this service can occupy.
5. <Remote MAC>: Remote MAC address, only for p2p service mode.

294 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Step 4: In the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window, click the "…" button beside the
<Maximum Bandwidth> box. The <Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration> window will appear.
(See Fig. 20.64)

Fig. 20.64 Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration

The <Rate Limiting List> table shows the current Rate Limit setting. You can modify current
rate limit setting or add new one in the <Add or Modify Rate Limit> panel.
6. Add Rate Limit:
1. Select one Rate Limit Index from 1 to 8 except those numbers which have been
occupied and input corresponding limited rate which unit is kb/s.
2. Click <OK> to add a new rate limit item.
Note: There should be 8 levels of rate limit in every station.
7. Modify Rate Limit:
1. Select the rate limit index that you want to modify and input new limited rate.
2. Click <OK> and confirm this modify.
Note: The rate limit can’t be modified unless there is no service using this rate.

Step 5: After you configure the <Add RPR Service> window, the information of the added
station will appear in the <Add Station> panel in the <RPR Service Configuration> window.
(See Fig. 20.65)

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 295


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.65 Add RPR Service Station – Finish

To delete an RPR service station, take the following steps:

Step 1: Select <RPR>→<RPR Service Management> from the main menu. The <RPR
Service Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 20.66)

Fig. 20.66 RPR Service Management


Step 2: Click <Query>, and the available RPR Service will be listed in the <RPR Service
List> panel. (See Fig. 20.67)

296 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

Fig. 20.67 RPR Service Management – Query Result

Step 3: Click <Delete> and select <Yes> in the pop-up window (See Fig. 20.68). The RPR
service will be deleted.

Fig. 20.68 Delete RPR Service – Confirm Window

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 297


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

21 Abbreviation
ACL Access Control List
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU Administration Unit
BBE Background Block Error
CC Cross-Connect
CF Compact Flash
CLI Command Line Interface
CoS Class of Service
CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second
DCC Data Communication Channel
DEG Degraded
EM Element Management
EOW Ethernet over WDM
EQP Equipped
ES Errored Second
EXC Excessive error
FC Fault Count
FE Fast Ethernet, Far End
FOP Failure of Protocol
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP General Framing Procedure
HP High Path
IOP Input Optical Power
LAN Local Area Network
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
LB Laser Bias
LOC Loss Of Continuity
LOM Loss of Multiframe
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOS Loss of Signal
LP Low Path
MS Multiplex Section
MS-SPRing Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTP Multi-Service Transport Platform
NE Near End
NPJC Negative Pointer Justification Count
OCD Out of Cell Delineation
OFS Out of Frame Second
OOP Output Optical Power

298 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy


PJCN Pointer Change Negative
PLM Payload Mismatch
PPI PDH Physical Interface
PPJC Positive Pointer Justification Count
QoS Quality of Service
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RS Regenerator Section
SC System Control
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SECB Severely Error Cell Block
SES Severely Errored Second
TNMS-MP Simple Network Management Protocol
SPI SDH Physical Interface
TCA Threshold Crossing Alert
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TIM Trace Identification Mismatch
TLS Transparent LAN Service
TP Termination Point
TU Tributary Unit
UAS Un-Available Second
UNEQ Unequipped
VC Virtual Concatenation
VPN Virtual Private Network
VSTM Virtual STM

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 299


User Manual Instructions
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

22 Index

A M
ACL Configuration, 114 Main Window, 44
Add Cross-Connection, 83 Maintenance, 181
AIS/RDI Insertion Test, 184 MIB Management, 71
Alarm MSSPRING, 154, 288
Alarm Configuration, 250
Clearing Alarms, 238
Alarm, 235 N
Viewing Active Alarms, 236 NE IP, 73
NE Property Configuration, 65
C NE Software Management, 69
NE Usage Statistics, 259
Card Configuration and Management, 75 Node Event Log, 255
CC 1+1 Protection, 141
CC Configuration and Management, 82
O
D OSI Configuration, 164

Delete Card, 77
Deleting Connection, 84 P
Domain Control, 61 Performance Monitoring, 186
PRBS Test, 181
E Priority Algorithm, 104

EOW Configuration, 95
Ethernet Configuration and Management, 96 R
Ethernet IP, 74 RSTP Configuration, 118

F S
Fault Management, 247 SDH Port Configuration and Management, 77
FTP Settings, 68 Security Management, 51
Shut Down LCT, 43
G Shutdown NE, 67
SNCP, 147
Group Broadcast, 115 Software Configuration, 28
Start LCT, 41
Static MAC Address, 112
H Synchronization Management, 89
Hardware Configuration, 27 Synchronize, 64

I T
Install LCT software package, 34 Timing Setting, 72
TP Configuration and Management, 85

L U
LAN Card Configuration, 98
LED Indicators, 243 Uninstall LCT Software Package, 39
LED Test, 185
Linear Multiplex Section Group Protection, 151 V
Lock Screen, 61
Loop-back Test, 182 VLAN Management, 109

300 A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619


Instructions User Manual
TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 3.4 LCT

WAN Port Configuration, 105


W

A42022-L5969-E 53-1-7619 301

You might also like